Mercedes Benz 2003 C Class Coupe Users Manual

2015-02-05

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2003-C-Class-Coupe-Users-Manual-398315 mercedes-benz-2003-c-class-coupe-users-manual-398315 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 356

DownloadMercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2003-C-Class-Coupe-Users-Manual-  Mercedes-benz-2003-c-class-coupe-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
C 230 Kompressor
C 320

Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to
own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:

앫

Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to
your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.

앫

Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.

앫

Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents

Introduction ......................................... 9
Product information ............................... 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership .... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada ......................... 13
Where to find it .................................... 14
Symbols ............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle .................. 17
Reporting safety defects ...................... 18
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18

At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit .................................................20
Instrument cluster ................................22
Multifunction steering wheel ................24
Center console .....................................25
Overhead control panel ........................26
Door control panel ................................27
Getting started ...................................29
Unlocking .............................................30
Unlocking with the SmartKey ..........30
Adjusting ..............................................32
Seats ...............................................32
Steering wheel ................................37
Mirrors ............................................39
Driving ..................................................41
Fastening the seat belt ...................41
Starting the engine .........................44
Switching on headlamps .................47
Turn signals and high beam ............47
Windshield wipers ...........................48
Problems while driving ....................50

Parking and locking ..............................51
Parking brake ..................................51
Switching off headlamps .................52
Turning off engine ...........................52
Safety and Security ...........................55
Occupant safety ...................................56
Airbags ...........................................57
Seat belts .......................................62
Children in the vehicle ....................65
Panic alarm* ........................................72
Activating ........................................72
Deactivating ....................................72
Driving safety systems .........................73
ABS .................................................73
BAS .................................................74
ESP .................................................75
Anti-theft systems ................................78
Immobilizer .....................................78
Anti-theft alarm system* ................78
Tow-away alarm* ............................79

Contents

Controls in detail ............................... 81
Locking and unlocking ......................... 82
SmartKey ........................................ 82
Opening the doors from the inside . 85
Opening the trunk lid ...................... 85
Closing the trunk lid ....................... 86
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 86
Automatic central locking .............. 87
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ....................................... 87
Seats .................................................... 89
Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 89
Head restraints............................... 90
Heated seats* ................................ 91
Memory function* ................................ 93
Storing positions into memory ....... 94
Recalling positions from memory ... 94
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ............................. 95
Lighting ................................................ 96
Exterior lamp switch ....................... 96
Combination switch ........................ 99
Hazard warning flasher ................... 99
Interior lighting ............................. 100

Instrument cluster ............................. 102
Instrument cluster illumination .... 102
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 102
Trip odometer .............................. 103
Tachometer .................................. 103
Outside temperature indicator ..... 104
Control system .................................. 105
Multifunction display .................... 105
Multifunction steering wheel ........ 106
Menus .......................................... 108
Standard display menu ................ 110
AUDIO menu ................................ 110
NAV menu .................................... 112
Malfunction memory menu .......... 112
Settings menu .............................. 114
Trip computer menu ..................... 125
TEL menu* ................................... 126
Manual transmission ......................... 130
Shifting into reverse ..................... 131
Automatic transmission* ................... 132
One-touch gearshifting ................. 133
Gear ranges .................................. 134
Gear selector lever position ......... 135
Program mode selector switch ..... 136
Accelerator position ..................... 137

Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 137
Good visibility .................................... 138
Rear view mirror ........................... 138
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 140
Sun visors .................................... 141
Climate control .................................. 142
Setting the temperature ............... 145
Adjusting air distribution and
volume ......................................... 145
Defrosting .................................... 146
Air recirculation mode .................. 146
Rear window defroster ................. 147
Air conditioning ............................ 148
Ventilated storage compartment . 148
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 149
Deactivating the climate control
system ......................................... 149
Automatic climate control*
(Canada only) .................................... 150
Setting the temperature ............... 152
Adjusting air distribution .............. 153
Adjusting air volume .................... 153
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ....... 154
Defrosting .................................... 154

Contents

Air recirculation mode .................. 154
Charcoal filter .............................. 156
Rear window defroster ................. 156
Air conditioning ............................ 157
Residual heat and ventilation* ..... 158
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 158
Audio system ..................................... 159
Audio and telephone, operation ... 159
Operating safety ........................... 159
Operating and display elements ... 160
Button and soft key operation ...... 162
Operation ..................................... 162
Radio mode .................................. 165
Cassette mode ............................. 168
CD changer* operating mode ...... 172
Telephone* operation .................. 176
Power windows .................................. 182
Opening and closing the windows 182
Synchronizing power windows ..... 184
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ......... 185
Opening and closing the
sunshades for the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 185
Opening and closing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 186

Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof ..................... 188
Driving systems ................................. 189
Cruise control .............................. 189
Loading .............................................. 192
Roof rack* ................................... 192
Luggage cover ............................. 192
Split folding rear bench seat ......... 192
Loading instructions .................... 194
Useful features .................................. 195
Interior storage spaces ................ 195
Ashtrays ....................................... 198
Cigarette lighter ........................... 199
Telephone* ................................... 200
Tele Aid* ...................................... 201
Garage door opener...................... 209
Operation ......................................... 213
The first 1000 miles (1500km) .......... 214
Driving instructions ........................... 215
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 215
Drinking and driving ..................... 215
Pedals .......................................... 215
Power assistance .......................... 216
Brakes........................................... 216

Driving off .....................................217
Parking .........................................217
Tires ..............................................218
Hydroplaning ................................ 219
Tire traction ..................................219
Tire speed rating ...........................219
Winter driving instructions ............220
Standing water .............................221
Passenger compartment ...............221
Driving abroad ..............................221
Control and operation of radio
transmitter ....................................222
Catalytic converter .......................222
Emission control ...........................223
Coolant temperature ....................223
At the gas station ...............................224
Check regularly and before a
long trip ........................................225
Engine compartment .......................... 226
Hood .............................................226
Engine oil ......................................227
Transmission fluid level ................229
Coolant level .................................229
Battery ..........................................231
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system ...........232

Contents

Tires and wheels ................................ 233
Important guidelines .................... 233
Life of tire ..................................... 234
Direction of rotation ..................... 234
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 234
Rotating wheels ............................ 235
Winter driving..................................... 236
Winter tires ................................... 236
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 237
Snow chains ................................. 237
Maintenance ...................................... 238
Clearing the service indicator....... 238
Service term exceeded ................. 238
Calling up the service indicator .... 239
Resetting the service indicator..... 239
Vehicle care ....................................... 240
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 240

Practical hints.................................. 245
What to do if … .................................. 246
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 246
Lamp in center console ................ 251
Messages in the display ............... 252
Where will I find ... ............................. 271
First aid kit ................................... 271
Spare wheel ................................. 271
Vehicle tool kit ............................. 272
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 274
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 274
Locking the vehicle ...................... 275
Changing batteries ....................... 276
Fuel filler flap ............................... 277
Manually unlocking the
transmission selector lever .......... 277
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 278
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof ..... 278
Replacing bulbs ................................. 280
Bulbs ............................................ 280
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 282
Side marker lamp bulb ................. 285
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 285

Replacing wiper blades ...................... 287
Removing ..................................... 287
Installing ...................................... 287
Flat tire .............................................. 288
Preparing the vehicle ................... 288
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 288
Battery ............................................... 294
Disconnecting the battery ............ 295
Removing the batteries ................ 295
Charging and reinstalling
batteries ...................................... 295
Reconnecting the batteries .......... 295
Jump starting ..................................... 297
Towing the vehicle ............................. 299
Installing towing eye bolt ............. 302
Fuses ................................................. 303
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ............................... 303
Fuse box in engine compartment . 303
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk ............ 304

Contents

Technical data ................................. 305
Spare parts service ............................ 306
Warranty coverage ............................. 307
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ..................... 307
Identification labels ........................... 308
Certification label ......................... 308
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ............................................. 308
Identification labels and numbers 308
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 309
C 230 Kompressor ....................... 309
C 320 ........................................... 309
Engine ................................................ 310
Rims and Tires ................................... 311
Same size tires ............................. 311
Mixed size tires ............................ 312
Spare wheel ................................. 313

Electrical system ................................ 314
Main Dimensions................................ 315
Weights .............................................. 316
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 317
Capacities ..................................... 317
Engine oils .................................... 319
Engine oil additives ....................... 319
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 319
Brake fluid .................................... 319
Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 320
Fuel requirements ........................ 320
Gasoline additives ........................ 321
Coolants ...................................... 321
Windshield and headlamp
washer system ............................. 324
Consumer information ....................... 325
Uniform tire quality grading ......... 325

Technical terms ...............................327
Index .................................................333

Contents

Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for
your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and their special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.

Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, also
on permissible technical modifications,
and where proper installation will be performed.

9

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

10

We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫

New Car Limited Warranty,

앫

Emission System Warranty,

앫

Emission Performance Warranty,

앫

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),

앫

State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.

11

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance

Roadside Assistance

Change of address or ownership

The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.

For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.

Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

12

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫

Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,

앫

unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,

앫

gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5

13

Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to
find information quickly each section has
its own reference color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.

Controls in detail

Technical data

Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.

All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.

Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.

14

Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.

Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫

this Operator’s Manual

앫

the Service Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.

Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*

Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.

Warning!

G

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.

왘

This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.

왘

A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.

컄

Page

!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.

컄컄

This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.

->

In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term definitions.

Display

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.

i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.

This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.

15

Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!

G

Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modification made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems.
Electronic system malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

16

Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫

the safety precautions in this manual

앫

the “Technical data” section in this
manual

앫

traffic rules and regulations

앫

motor vehicle laws and safety standards

Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5

17

Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

18

At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel

19

At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit

20

At a glance
Cockpit
Item
1 Headlamp washer switch*
2 Combination switch

Page
140

Item
10 Glove box lid

Page
195

47

11 Center console

25

앫

Turn signals

47

12 Starter switch

31

앫

Windshield wipers

48

38

앫

High beam

99

13 Steering wheel adjustment
handle, manual

3 Cruise control lever

189

14 Hood lock release

4 Instrument cluster

22,
102

15 Parking brake pedal

24,
106

17 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk, electrical*

38

6 Horn

18 Parking brake release

46

7 Lever for voice control
system*, see separate operating instructions

19 Door control panel

27

5 Multifunction steering
wheel

8 Overhead control panel
9 Glove box lid release

16 Power window switches

20 Exterior lamp switch
26

21 Exterior mirror adjustment

226
46
182

47, 96
39

195

21

At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster

22

At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item

Page

Item

1 Reset knob for:

Page

3 Speedometer with:

Resetting trip odometer

103

앫

Instrument cluster illumination

102

K Right turn signal indicator lamp

앫

Resetting individual
settings

114

v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp

앫

? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp

250

A High beam headlamp indicator

- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp

247

E Indicator lamp without function1

; Brake warning
lamp, except Canada

249

3 Brake warning
lamp, Canada only

249

DTR
1

Page

4 Multifunction display
with:

L Left turn signal indicator lamp

2 Tachometer with:

Item

Trip odometer

103

Main odometer
246

99

Indicator lamp without function1

The indicator lamp illuminates briefly when you
turn the key in the starter switch to position 2

Outside temperature display

104

Digital clock

116

5 Display for program
mode and selector lever
position

135
136

6 Fuel gauge with:
Fuel reserve warning lamp

250

< Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp

250

1 Supplemental restraint system indicator lamp

248

23

At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item

Item

1 Multifunction display in
speedometer

105

4 Menu systems: Press button

Operating control system

106

è for next system
ÿ for previous system

2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume

5 Moving within a menu:
Press button

ç down/to decrease

j for next display

æ up/to increase

k for previous display

3 Telephone*: Press button
í to take a call
ì to end a call

24

Page

Page

At a glance
Center console
Center console
Item

Page

Item

1 Seat heater*, driver‘s side

91

2 ESP control switch

75

10 Ashtray

198

3 Hazard warning flasher
switch – switching on/off

99

11 Storage compartment

196

12 Armrest

197

4 Central locking switch

87
78

13 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission

136

5 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp

79

14 Gearshift lever for manual
transmission

44

Tow-away alarm switch
6 Seat heater*, passenger
side

91

7 Indicator lamp 7

67

8 Audio system, or

9 Climate control

Page

Selector lever for automatic transmission

142

45

159

COMAND* (see separate
operating instructions)

25

At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item

26

Page

1 Rear interior lighting
on/off

100

2 Panorama sliding/pop-up
roof*

186

3 Right reading lamp on/off

101

4 Interior lighting control

100

5 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid* (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instructions)

200

6 Rear view mirror

39,
138

7 Garage door opener

209

8 Left reading lamp on/off

101

9 Tele Aid* (emergency call
system) button

204

At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item

Page

1 Door handle

85

2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings)

93

3 Seat adjustment

32

4 Switches for opening/closing front door windows

182

27

28

Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

29

Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.

Unlocking with the SmartKey

Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button* 3.

If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further information. The corresponding page references are at the end of each segment.

왘

Press unlock button 2 Πon the key.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button
2 ΠUnlock button
3 Â Panic button* (컄 page 72)

30

i

왘

Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the starter switch.

Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Starter switch

0 For removing key
The steering is locked when the key is
removed from the starter switch. If
necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to
engage.
1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position

i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.

!
If the key is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of
time, it can no longer be turned in the
starter switch.
앫

Remove the key from the starter
switch and reinsert.

If the key can still not be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
앫

Check the battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 294).

앫

Get a jump start (컄 page 297).

To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the key from the starter
switch.

31

Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!

G

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.

Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

Seats
The seats can be adjusted either manually
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s
equipment.
Warning!

G

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause

32

serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and
seat belts provide the best restraint when
the wearer is in an upright position and belts
are properly positioned on the body. Your
seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 41).

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle.
The power seats* can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Getting started
Adjusting

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.

Manual seat

Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘

Lift handle 1.

왘

Slide seat to the desired position.

왘

Allow handle 1 to reengage. Check for
proper engagement before driving.

왘

Check for proper engagement before
driving.

Adjust to a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position
should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

i
When moving the seats, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat cushion tilt
3 Seat height
4 Backrest tilt

Seat cushion tilt
왘

Seat height
왘

Pull handle 3 up to raise seat cushion.
Push handle 3 down to lower seat
cushion

Backrest tilt
왘

Turn handwheel 4 forward or backward.

Head restraint height
Warning!

G

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward
until your upper legs are lightly supported.

33

Getting started
Adjusting
Power seat*
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or

왘

Open the driver’s or front passenger
door.

The seat adjustment switches are located
in each front door.
1 Release knob
왘

Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 89)

34

왘

Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.

i

Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward. To lower
the head restraint, push release knob 1
and press down on the head restraint.

When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat. Otherwise you could
damage the seat.

Head restraint tilt
왘

Seat fore and aft adjustment

1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment
5 Backrest tilt

With the memory function*
(컄 page 93) you can store seat positions together with settings for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.

Getting started
Adjusting
Seat height
왘

Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 2.

Seat cushion tilt
왘

Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.

Backrest tilt
왘

Press the switch forward or back in
direction of arrow 5 until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

Head restraint height
왘

Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.

Warning!

G

Folding the front seat backrest forward

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Head restraint tilt
왘

Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 89).

1 Release lever

i
In addition to the front seat backrests,
the front seat cushions can also be
shifted forward to permit easy access
to the rear whenever the seat is located
in the rear half of its adjustment range.
Swivel backrest forward by pulling the
release lever until the seat moves in a
combined forward and upward movement.

35

Getting started
Adjusting
Folding backrest forward
왘

왘

Pull release lever 1 forward and tilt the
seat backrest forward.

Folding backrest back
왘

Fold and press the backrest rearward
until it engages in driving position.

i

i

Vehicles with power seat*: The head
restraints will automatically move
down.

Vehicles with power seat*: The head
restraint returns to its previous positions.

Vehicles with manual seat adjustment:
If necessary, press the head restraint
downward while tilting the backrest
forward.

왘

Vehicles with manual seat adjustment:
If necessary, pull the head restraint out
while tilting the seat back.

Rear seat head restraints
Warning!

For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 89).

1 Lock button

36

G

Getting started
Adjusting
Folding head restraints back
왘

Push lock button 1.

Raising:
왘

The head restraints will fold backward.

Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.

Two different head restraint angle positions are available.
Head restraint height

Pull up on head restraint.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
press release knob 1 and pull the head
restraint out.

Placing head restraint upright
왘

Steering wheel

Lowering:
왘

Push button 1.

왘

Push down on head restraint.

Warning!

G

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature* can also be operated with the driver’s door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

1 Release knob

37

Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, manual

!

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*

Do not drive the vehicle until you have
properly locked the steering column.

왘

If the warning message STEERING
WHEEL ADJUST - LOCK! is displayed
while the engine is running, the steering column is not locked (컄 page 268).

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or

왘

Open the driver’s door.

The switch is located on the steering column (lower left).

1 Release handle
왘

To unlock the steering column, pull
handle 1 out until its stop limit.

왘

Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

왘

To lock, press handle 1 all the way in
until it engages.
The steering wheel is once again
locked into position.

38

1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten
2 Steering column, height

Getting started
Adjusting
Steering column, lengthen or shorten
왘

Move stalk forward or backward in the
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.

Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.

Steering column, height
왘

Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2. Make sure that your legs
can move freely and that all the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.

i
With the memory function*
(컄 page 93) you can store settings for
the steering wheel together with settings for the exterior rear view mirrors
and seat positions.

Inside rear view mirror

Mirrors

Warning!

왘

Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 138).

G

In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

39

Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!

The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.

G

Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state by applying plenty of water.

왘

Press button 3 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.

왘

Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left or right according to the setting desired.

i

1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger side mirror
3 Driver’s side mirror
왘

Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.

With the memory function*
(컄 page 93) you can store settings for
the exterior rear view mirrors together
with seat positions and settings for the
steering wheel.

!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward or backward,
reposition it by applying firm pressure
until it snaps into place. The mirror
housing is now properly positioned and
you can adjust the mirror normally.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 138).

40

Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!

G

Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.

Fastening the seat belt
Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 56).

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

41

Getting started
Driving

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.

Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.

42

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt - even
those in the rear.

Warning!

The seat belt presenter for driver and passenger makes it easier to put on the seat
belt.

G

Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 60).

1 Seat belt presenter
왘

Manually adjust the seat belt presenter
to the desired position

i
The seat belt presenter must be put
back to its original position before leaning the seat backrest toward the rear or
letting someone enter the rear passenger compartment.

Getting started
Driving
왘

If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.

Proper use of seat belts
앫

Do not twist the belt when fastening.

앫

Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm). For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet.

앫

Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.

앫

Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.

1 Button for belt outlet height adjustment

앫

Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.

왘

To raise, slide belt outlet upward.

앫

왘

To lower, press button 1 and slide belt
outlet downward.

Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.

앫

Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.

Belt outlet height adjustment

1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle
왘

With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from the belt outlet.

왘

Place the belt over your shoulder.

왘

Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until it
clicks.

43

Getting started
Driving
앫

Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
Warning!

G

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Starting the engine
Warning!

Manual transmission

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.

Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
왘

Make sure that the gearshift lever is in
Neutral position.

왘

Do not depress accelerator.

왘

Fully depress clutch pedal.
Otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the integrated safety interlock.

44

Getting started
Driving
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 3. Release only when the engine is firing regularly (컄 page 31).

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 130).
Automatic transmission*

왘

Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P.

왘

Do not depress accelerator.

Starting
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 31).

i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the key to position 3 and
release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
왘

Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission

P Park position with selector lever lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Depress the brake pedal.

Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘

Turn key in starter to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery

왘

Get a jump start (컄 page 297).

If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
with the key see “Turning off the engine”
(컄 page 52)

45

Getting started
Driving
Parking brake

왘

Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 1.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.

Driving

1 Release handle
2 Parking brake
Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.

46

왘

Depress the brake pedal.

왘

Move selector lever to position D or R
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).

왘

Release the brake pedal.

왘

Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.

i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.

!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.

!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission engages at a higher revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.

i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.

Getting started
Driving

Warning!

G

Vehicles with automatic transmission: It is
dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
or N if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control
of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Switching on headlamps

Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.

Exterior lamp switch

1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘

Turn the switch to B.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 96).

Combination switch

1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘

Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.

More information on driving can be found
in the “Operation” section (컄 page 215).

47

Getting started
Driving

i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.

Windshield wipers
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.

왘

Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I

High beam
왘

Switching on windshield wipers

Intermittent wiping

Push the combination switch forward.

II Normal wiper speed

The high beam symbol A in the
instrument cluster lights up.

III Fast wiper speed

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 99).
Combination switch

1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘

48

Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.

Getting started
Driving

i

Single wipe

Vehicles without rain sensor*: Fast
wiper speed III goes to setting II when
the vehicle is standing still.

왘

Vehicles with rain sensor*: Intermittent
wiping interval dependent on wetness
of windshield. Wiping will not occur
with a door open.

!
Vehicles with rain sensor*: Do not
leave in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or
during windshield cleaning. Wipers will
operate in presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.

Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.

If leaves, snow, etc. block the windshield wipers, switch off the wipers.

The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.

앫

For safety reasons, withdraw key
from starter switch. Remove blockage.

앫

Turn the windshield wipers on
again.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘

!

Push switch in the direction of arrow 1
past the resistance point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.

If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫

set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed.

앫

have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.

49

Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving

The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)

The engine runs erratically and misfires

The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.

앫

An ignition cable may be damaged.

앫

The engine electronics may not be operating properly.

앫

Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.

왘

Give very little gas.

왘

Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

50

왘

Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.

왘

Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 229).

In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘

Do not start the engine under any circumstances.

왘

Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

If no damage can be determined on the
앫

major assemblies

앫

fuel system

앫

engine mount

왘

Start the engine in the usual manner.

Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!

G

Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
system. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.

Warning!

G

Parking brake

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

앫

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

앫

Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).

앫

Slowly release brake pedal.

앫

When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards road curb.

앫

Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove.

앫

Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.

1 Release handle
2 Parking brake
왘

Step firmly on parking brake 2.
When the engine is running, the indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.

51

Getting started
Parking and locking

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (manual transmission:
first or reverse gear).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.

Switching off headlamps
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 47).

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 96).
Turning off engine
왘

Place the gear selector lever in
position P (manual transmission: first
or reverse gear).

i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (manual
transmission: first or reverse gear).

i
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.

52

Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘

왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).

i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.

Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.

왘

After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the remote control
(컄 page 30).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.

More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 82).

Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.

!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.

53

54

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

55

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.

The 1 warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up:
앫

The restraint systems are

for about 4 seconds when you turn the
key in the starter switch to position 1.

앫

Seat belts

앫

Emergency tensioning device

for about 4 seconds when you start the
engine by turning the key.

앫

Airbags

i

앫

Child seats

앫

Child seat recognition

앫

Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)

The warning lamp remains lit if the key
is turned to position 2 and left there.
The warning lamp will go out when you
start the engine.

As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each other.

i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 65).

56

앫

The warning lamp goes out shortly after
you start the engine. This shows that the
restraint systems are operational.
A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 warning lamp:
앫

fails to extinguish after approximately
4 seconds.

앫

does not come on at all.

앫

comes on after the engine was started
or while driving.

For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 248).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

G

In the event that the SRS malfunction indicator lamp lights up during driving or does not
come on at all, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Airbags
Warning!

Warning!

G

Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts which
may cause significant injuries. However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.

G

To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫

Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat backrest.

57

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

앫

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least ten
inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

앫

Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.

앫

Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.

58

앫

앫

Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always
sit upright, properly use the seat belts
and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front airbag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.

Warning!

G

Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger side front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door or rear

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

quarter trim panels where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or death should the side airbag
be activated.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear side
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can
be accomplished upon your written request
to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.

i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,
or side (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.

In cases of other frontal impacts,
angled impacts, roll-overs, other side
impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the airbags will not be activated.
The driver and passengers will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to ensure that the vehicle will continue
to provide supplement crash protection for occupants.

59

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
앫

앫

60

No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between airbags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).

앫

An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.

앫

Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.

앫

In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.

앫

앫

Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.

앫

Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.

For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

앫

Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.

앫

G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an “SRS” by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.

The front passenger airbag will only be deployed if:
앫

the front passenger seat is occupied

앫

the 7 indicator lamp in the center
console is not lit (컄 page 67).

!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.

Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
앫

in the event of a frontal impact

Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags

앫

if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold

The side impact airbags and window curtain airbags are deployed:

앫

independently of the side impact airbags

The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger airbag

앫

on the impacted side of the vehicle

앫

in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold

앫

independently of the front airbags

The side impact airbags are not deployed
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

61

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front passenger side airbag will only
deploy if the system senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied.

After starting the engine the seat belt nonusage warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and passengers to
fasten the seat belts.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in
most states and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

1 Window curtain airbag
2 Side impact airbags
Seat belts
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
in the instrument cluster lights up and a
warning sounds for a short time when you
turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2 and the driver‘s seat belt is not
fastened.

62

Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 41).

i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 65).

Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.

Warning!

G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.

Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫

Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.

앫

Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag,
front passenger airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device), and front
seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G

63

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

앫

앫

앫

64

Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.

앫

Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.

앫

Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.

앫

Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.

앫

Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.

Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when the seat belts are fastened:
앫

in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level

앫

if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 56)

In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

G

An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact airbag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.

Children in the vehicle

Infant and child restraint systems

If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:

Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.

앫

Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.

앫

Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.

Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.

We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver‘s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During the seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.

65

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 69).
For information on “LATCH”-type child
seat mounts (컄 page 70).

Warning!

G

Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.

!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.

66

Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system

bag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
The 7 indicator lamp located in the
center console will be illuminated, except
with the key removed or in the starter
switch position 0.

i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-

67

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the key in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2, the 7 indicator lamp
located in the center console lights up for
approx. 6 seconds and then goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 251).

Warning!

G

G

The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.

When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
front passenger airbag will not deploy only if
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.

Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.

Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.

BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.

68

Warning!

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Installation of infant and child restraint
systems

왘

Guide tether strap between head restraints and rear shelf.
Head restraint must be installed (if removable) and positioned such that the
top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of
seat back.

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the 7 indicator lamp not to come on
during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.

Make sure that the tether strap is not
twisted.
왘

Anchorage rings 1 are located on the back
side of the rear backrests and on the floor
behind rear seat.
Prior to installing a tether strap, note the
following steps:
왘

Fold backrest forward.

Fold backrest back until it locks in
place.

Warning!

G

Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by passengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.

69

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – “LATCH” type

i

This vehicle is equipped with two “LATCH”
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a “LATCH” child seat
with the matching anchor fittings.

The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchors.

If a child seat is not installed, the “LATCH”
anchors can be folded back between the
seat cushion and the backrest.
왘

Fold up anchorage ring 1.

왘

Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of
the tether strap, to anchorage ring 1.

왘

Press down button 2 on each anchor
and return anchor to its catch.

i
Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

i
For safety, make sure that the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.

70

To fold mounts back

왘

Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold
forward until they lock in place.

왘

Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children from
41 lbs. until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Before installing the child seat, make sure
anchors 1 are folded out and locked in
place.

Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or
child seat anchors must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.

71

Safety and Security
Panic alarm*
Panic alarm*
An audible alarm and blinking exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.

Activating
왘

Press and hold button 1 for at least one
second.

Deactivating

1 Â button

i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 1.

72

왘

Press button 1 again.

왘

Insert key in starter switch.

i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find informations on
the following driving safety systems:
앫

ABS (Antilock Brake System)

앫

BAS (Brake Assist System)

앫

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Warning!

i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP is only
achieved with winter tires (M+S tires),
or snow chains as required.

Warning!

ABS

G

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫

Excessive speed, especially in turns

앫

Wet and slippery road surfaces

앫

Following another vehicle too closely

The ABS, BAS, ESP cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

G

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.

Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and ability to steer
the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.

i
To alert following vehicles to slippery
road conditions you discover, operate
your hazard warning flashers as appropriate.

At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.

73

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

G

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

74

ABS control
The - malfunction indicator lamp in the
speedometer lights up when you turn the
key in the starter switch to position 2. It
goes out when the engine is running.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 247).

BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 254).

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

G

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.

ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer dial flashes when the ESP is engaged.
The warning lamp v in the speedometer dial lights up when you turn the key in
the starter switch to position 2. It goes out
when the engine is running.

Warning!

G

Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
speedometer dial. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫

While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.

앫

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

앫

Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.

75

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

G

The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Switching off the ESP

!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (key in
starter switch position 0 or 1) when
앫

the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer

앫

the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised

Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
rear axle brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size.

Warning!

The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫

starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains

앫

sand or gravel

More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 246).

76

G

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the center console.

If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer dial flashes, regardless of the
speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when ESP is deactivated.
ESP always operates when you are braking, even when it has been deactivated.

!
1 ESP off
2 ESP on
왘

Press upper half 1 of the switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer dial comes on.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning!

G

When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.

Switching on the ESP
왘

Press lower half 2 of the switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.

ESP is deactivated.

77

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer

Anti-theft alarm system*

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.

Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens

Activating
앫

Removing the key from the starter
switch activates the immobilizer.

Deactivating
앫

Inserting the key in the starter switch
deactivates the immobilizer.

i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

78

앫

a door

앫

the trunk lid

앫

the hood.

The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫

someone attempts to raise the vehicle

앫

the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key.

and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn
signal lamps blink three times to indicate
that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the switch for the tow-away
alarm will blink after approximately 10 seconds when the alarm system is completely
armed (컄 page 80).

i
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
앫

a door

i

앫

the trunk lid

If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,

앫

the hood

Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system

Tow-away alarm*

The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The
turn signal lamps blink once to indicate
that the alarm system is deactivated.

Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.

i
The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if
a door or the trunk is not opened.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
왘

Insert the key in the starter switch.

or
왘

i
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.

Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.

If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.

Press the Œ or ‹ button.

79

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming tow-away alarm

i

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.

You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
왘

Press upper half 1 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights up
briefly.

왘

Lock your vehicle with the key.

The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.

1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
The switch is located on the center console.
왘

Turn off the ignition and remove the
key.

80

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Audio system
Power windows
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features

81

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.

Information on locking and unlocking can
be found in the “Getting started” section
on (컄 page 30) and (컄 page 51).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys with remote controls and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs
for the mechanical key portion of the two
keys are a different color to help distinguish each key unit.
The remote control key provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft,
however, it is advisable to only unlock the
vehicle when you are in close proximity to
it.
The key centrally locks and unlocks:

82

앫

the doors

앫

the trunk lid

앫

the fuel filler flap

SmartKey with remote controls

1 ‹ Lock button
2 Mechanical key locking tab
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Battery check lamp
5 Â Panic button* (컄 page 72)

i
Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an
anti-theft alarm system* have
SmartKeys with integrated panic
button* 5.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i

Global locking

You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 183) and panorama
sliding/pop-up roof (컄 page 185) from
outside using the SmartKey.

왘

!

Selective setting

To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the key to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘

Press button Œ.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.

The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk lid is
opened, the SmartKey is not inserted in
the starter switch, or the central locking
switch is not activated.

Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.

Restoring to factory setting
왘

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.

Warning!
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the key so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 4 blinks twice.

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. It is possible for children to open a
locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

The key will then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘

Press button Πonce.

Global unlocking
왘

Press button Πtwice.

Global locking
왘

Press button ‹.

83

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!

Checking the batteries

If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the key, then either the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged or the key is malfunctioning or
the vehicle battery is drained.

왘

앫

Check the batteries in the key and
replace them if necessary
(컄 page 276).
or

앫

Check the vehicle battery
(컄 page 294).
or

앫

Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 274) as required.
Lock the vehicle using the mechanical key (컄 page 275).

If the key is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

84

Press button ‹ or Œ.

Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:

Battery check lamp 4 lights up briefly
to indicate that the key batteries are in
order.

왘

Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!

왘

If battery check lamp 4 does not light
up briefly during check, then the key
batteries are discharged.

Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.

왘

If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.

Replace the batteries (컄 page 276).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside

i

Opening the trunk lid

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.

If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the remote control, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the alarm.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫

Press button Œ or‹ on the
SmartKey.

앫

Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

1 Handle
왘

1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘

Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.

Pull handle 1 in direction of arrow to
open the trunk lid.

The trunk lid swings open upwards. Always
make sure that there is sufficient overhead
clearance.

i
The vehicle must be unlocked.

85

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk lid

Warning!

G

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

Trunk lid emergency release

1 Handle
왘

Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
grip 1.

왘

Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on it.

Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are
around.

86

앫

The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk lid.

왘

Briefly press the emergency release
button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.

!
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.

i
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens.
The emergency release button is located in
the trunk lid.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫

The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk lid

To cancel the alarm, insert the key in
the starter switch or press button Œ
or‹ on the key.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk lid automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.

Locking and unlocking from the inside

i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫

is pushed

앫

is on a test stand

You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 122).

You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk lid from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

87

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The switch is located in the center console.

Unlocking
왘

Press lower half 2 of the central locking switch.
The vehicle unlocks.

i
You can open a locked door from inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
Central locking switch

1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Locking
왘

Press upper half 1 of the central locking switch.
If both front doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

88

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
앫

while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.

앫

while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from
the inside.

Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 32).
Easy-entry/exit feature*
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver’s seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch and the driver’s door is closed,
the steering wheel and the driver’s seat return to their last set position.

Warning!

G

You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature* is activated,
the driver’s door is being opened and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.

You can activate the following functions:
앫

Steering column:
Only the steering column is adjusted.

앫

Steering column and seat:
The steering column and the seat are
adjusted.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the individual setting
menu of the control system (컄 page 123).

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature*, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

89

Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints

Front seat head restraints, manual seat

Front seat head restraints, power seat*

Removing front head restraints

Removing front head restraints

Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 32).
Warning!

G

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

왘

Pull head restraint to its highest position.

왘

Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.

왘

Push button 1 and pull out head restraint.

왘

Pull out head restraint.

Installing front head restraints

i
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier
removal and installation of the head restraints.

90

Installing front head restraints
왘

Insert head restraint and push it down
to the stop.

왘

Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to desired position.

왘

Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.

왘

Push the head restraint down until it
engages.

왘

Adjust head restraint to desired position.

Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints

Warning!

G

For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.

Heated seats*
The switches are located in the center console.

Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.

Removing rear head restraints
왘

Pull head restraint to its highest position.

왘

Push button 1 and pull out head restraint.

Installing rear head restraints
왘

Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.

왘

Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to desired position.

1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
왘

Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.

91

Controls in detail
Seats
Switching on seat heating
왘

i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp remains lit.

Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
lights up.

Switching on rapid seat heating
왘

Press lower switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
light up.

!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

92

Switching off seat heating
왘

If one indicator lamp is on, press upper
switch position 1.

왘

If both indicator lamps are on, press
lower switch position 2.

i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.

Controls in detail
Memory function*
Memory function*
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. Also see airbag section (컄 page 57) for proper seat
positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.

The memory button and stored position
switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per key.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫

Driver’s seat and backrest position

앫

Steering wheel position

앫

Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position

앫

Passenger side exterior rear view mirror position

앫

Front passenger seat position

Warning!

G

Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.

These key-dependent memory settings
can be deactivated if desired
(컄 page 124).

93

Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing positions into memory

1 Memory button
2 Stored position button
왘

Make sure that the ignition is switched
on or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.

왘

Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 32).

왘

Turn button 2 to selected memory position.

왘

Press memory button 1.

왘

Release memory button and push
button 2 within three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.

Recalling positions from memory
왘

Turn button 2 to selected memory position.

왘

Press and hold button 2 until the seat,
steering wheel and rear view mirrors
have fully moved to the stored positions.

i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.

Warning!

G

Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.

94

Controls in detail
Memory function*
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
You can store a parking position for the
passenger exterior rear view mirror for
each key using the memory switch.
For information about activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior rear
view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 124).

1 Adjustment button
2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror
3 Memory button
왘

Stop the vehicle.

왘

Switch ignition on (if not already on).

왘

Press button 2.

왘

Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 1 so that you see the rear
wheel and the curb.

왘

Press memory button “M” 3 on the
door.

왘

Within three seconds press bottom of
adjustment button 1 above the exterior
lamp switch.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.

i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.

The passenger side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.

95

Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 47).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel

M Off

i

U Automatic headlamp mode

If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then

C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is also switched
on.
B Low beam plus parking lamps or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)

96

앫

a warning sounds

앫

$ appears in the multifunction
display

앫

the message TURN OFF LAMPS appears in the multifunction display

i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see above.
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.

Warning!

G

In automatic headlamp mode, the headlamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
you and to others, activate headlamps by
turning exterior lamp switch to B.
The driver is responsible for the operation of
the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. Switch on the vehicle lights manually
when driving or when traffic conditions require you to do so.

i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.

i
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B.

i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

97

Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘

Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.

To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 119).

When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.

98

Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.

i

When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only

i

See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 96).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 120) and “Exterior lamps delayed
shut off” (컄 page 120).
Switching on front fog lamps
왘

Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.

왘

Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.

Switching on rear fog lamp
왘

Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.

왘

Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch lights up.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.

High beam flasher
왘

Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.

Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘

Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
The switch is located on the center console.

Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
All turn signals will blink.

Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘

Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.

1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Switching on high beams
왘

Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or to U (컄 page 96).

왘

Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam symbol is illuminated on
the instrument cluster.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

99

Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.

i

Deactivating automatic control

If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes, when the key
is removed or in the starter switch
position 0.

왘

The interior lighting remains switched
off, even when

An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Activating automatic control
왘

1 Rear interior lights
2 Right front reading lamp
3 Rocker switch: Automatic control off
4 Rocker switch: Automatic control on
5 Rocker switch: Front interior lights on
6 Left front reading lamp

앫

centrally unlocking the vehicle

앫

opening a door

앫

removing the SmartKey from the
starter switch

Press the rocker switch to the center
position 4.

Manual control

Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when

Switching rear interior lights on and off

앫

unlocking the vehicle

앫

opening a door

앫

removing the SmartKey from starter switch

The interior lamps are switched off following an adjustable time delay (컄 page 121).

100

Press the rocker switch to the right
position 3

왘

Press button 1.
The lights in the rear passenger compartment go on.

왘

Press button 1 again.
The lights in the rear passenger compartment go out.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching right front reading lamp on
and off
왘

Switching all front interior lights on
왘

Press button 2.

Press rocker switch to position 5.
The front interior lamps go on.

The right reading lamp goes on.
왘

Press button 2 again.
The right reading lamp goes off.

Switching all front interior lights off
왘

Press rocker switch to position 3 or 4.
The front interior lamps go out.

Switching left front reading lamp on and
off
왘

Press button 6.
The left reading lamp goes on.

왘

Press button 6 again.
The left reading lamp goes off.

i
The setting selected for the interior
lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
well.
If you leave the trunk lid open for an extended period of time, the trunk lighting will switch off automatically after
approximately ten minutes

101

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 22).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫

open a door

앫

turn on the ignition

앫

press the reset knob (컄 page 22)

앫

switch on the exterior lamps

Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset knob (컄 page 22) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.

To dim illumination
왘

The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.

i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.

You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 116).

Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!

Turn the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 22) clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.

G

앫

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

앫

Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.

To brighten illumination
왘

Turn the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 22) counterclockwise.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.

102

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘

왘

Call up the trip odometer and main
odometer by pressing button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 106).
Press button j or k until the
coolant temperature gauge appears.

i

Trip odometer

Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning in the multifunction display

왘

During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

Check to see that the trip odometer
and main odometer (컄 page 105) appear in the multifunction display.

왘

Press and hold the reset knob on the instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until the
trip odometer is reset.

The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.

!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.

103

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

104

The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).

When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the key in the starter switch is turned to
position 1. The control system enables you
to
앫

call up information about your vehicle

앫

change vehicle settings

For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.

i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player, cassette player) will appear in English, regardless of the
language selected.

Warning!

G

Multifunction display

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.

The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.

1 Main odometer
2 Trip odometer
3 Automatic transmission program mode
4 Current gear selector lever position
5 Digital clock
6 Outside temperature

105

Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
ç down / to decrease
æ up / to increase

3 Telephone*
í to take a call
ì to end a call

4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu

5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display

106

Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.

Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫

앫

If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.

In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 114).

The menus are described on the following
pages.

The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.

107

Controls in detail
Control system
Menus

108

This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.

The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.

Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1

Menu 2

Menu 3

Menu 4

Menu 5

Menu 6

Menu 7

Standard display

AUDIO

NAV*

Malfunction
memory

Settings

Trip computer

Telephone

Fuel consumption
statistics after
start

Load phone
book

Commands/submenus

Coolant temper- Select radio sta- Activate route
ature gauge
tion
guidance

Call up malfunc- Reset to factory
tion messages
settings

Digital speedometer

Operate CD
player*

Instrument cluster Fuel consumption Search for name
submenu
statistics since the in phone book
last reset

Call up FSS

Operate cassette player

Lighting submenu Call up range

Check engine oil
level

Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu

109

Controls in detail
Control system

i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.

Standard display menu

AUDIO menu

You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j .

The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.

The following functions are available:

If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.

Function

Page

Call up coolant temperature
gauge

102

Call up digital speedometer

see
below

Function

Page

Select radio station

111

Call up FSS

238

Operate CD player*

111

Check engine oil level

227

Operate cassette player

112

Display digital speedometer
왘

Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.

110

The following functions are available:

Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
왘

왘

Turn on the radio (컄 page 160). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate
operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.

왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.

Operate the CD player*
왘

Turn on the radio and select the CD
player (컄 page 160). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.

The type of search depends on the setting for the station tuning
(컄 page 122):
앫

The next stored station is selected
(SP)

앫

Station search

i

1 Station frequency
2 Waveband setting
3 Setting for station selection using
memory

You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio
(컄 page 165). Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.

1 Current track
2 Current CD (for CD changer*)
왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.

i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the audio system or
the COMAND* system key pad located
in the center dashboard.

111

Controls in detail
Control system
Operate the cassette player*
왘

Turn on the radio and select the cassette player (컄 page 160). Vehicles
with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the cassette currently being played are shown in the
display.

i
To select the reverse side of the tape,
press button below track number on
the audio system display, or enter request on the COMAND* system located in the center dashboard.
NAV menu
The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.
왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAV in the
display.

앫

If the navigation system is switched off,
the message NAV OFF is shown in the
display.

앫

If the navigation system is on, the message NAV ACTIVE is shown in the display.

1 Current side
왘

Press button j to fast forward to
the next track.

왘

Press button k to rewind the cassette to the beginning of the current
track.

112

Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.

Malfunction memory menu
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What information is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
Warning!

G

Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 252).

Controls in detail
Control system
왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.

Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:

No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:

Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the key in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

i

NO MALFUNCTION

1 Number of malfunctions
왘

Press button k or j .

The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the key in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2. You will then
only see Priority 1 malfunctions
(컄 page 252).

The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 252).

113

Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions:
앫

The function RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS, with which you can reset all the
settings to the original factory settings.

앫

A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the SETTINGS menu is seen in the
display.

Resetting all settings

Submenus in the Settings menu

You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.

왘

왘

In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.

Press the reset knob in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 22) for approximately
three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset knob again to confirm.
왘

Press button ç .
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.

왘

Press the reset knob again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.

i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset knob a second
time.

114

Press button k or j .

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.

Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting the functions of a submenu
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘

Move to a function in the submenu.

왘

Press the reset knob in the instrument
cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset knob again to confirm.

왘

Press the reset knob again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.

The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

LIGHTING

VEHICLE

Set time (hours)

Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode
(USA only)
(radio)

Activate easy-entry/exit feature

Set time (minutes)

Set locator lighting

Set key dependency

Select time display mode

Exterior lamps delayed shut-off

Select temperature display
mode

Interior lighting delayed shut-off

Set automatic locking

CONVENIENCE

Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror

Select speedometer display
mode
Select language
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)

115

Controls in detail
Control system
Set time (minutes)

Instrument cluster submenu

Set time (hours)

Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu
via the SETTINGS menu. Use the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The
following functions are available:

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TIME SETTINGS – MINUTES.

Function

Page

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TIME SETTINGS – HOURS.

Set time (hours)

see
below

The selection marker is on the hour setting.

Set time (minutes)

see
below

Select time display mode

117

Select temperature display
mode

117

Select speedometer display
mode

117

Select language

118

Select display (speed display or 118
outside temperature)

116

왘

Press æ or ç to set the hour.

The selection marker is on the minute
setting.

왘

Press æ or ç to set the minutes.

Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting time display mode

Selecting temperature display mode

Selecting speedometer display mode

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: 12/24 Hour.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEMP. INDICATOR.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press æ or ç to set the 12h or
24h time display mode.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press æ or ç to set temperature
unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to km or miles.

117

Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEXT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature)
왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SELECT DISPLAY.

Available languages:
앫

German

앫

English

앫

Italian

앫

French

앫

Spanish

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

118

Press æ or ç to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Function

Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LAMP CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE.

Page

Set daytime running lamp mode see
(USA only)
below
Set locator lighting

120

Exterior lamps delayed shut-off

120

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
앫

Parking lamps and low beam headlamps

앫

License plate lamps in low ambient
light conditions

i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.

Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121

왘

Press æ or ç to select manual
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.

For safety reasons, resetting the
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 115) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING.

119

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting

왘

During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated, and the vehicle is unlocked by remote control:

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

When the delayed shut-off feature is activated and the exterior lamp switch is in position U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the key from
the starter switch:
앫

Parking lamps

앫

Parking lamps

앫

Tail lamps

앫

Tail lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

To activate locator lighting:
왘
왘

Make sure the function LOCATOR
LIGHTING is set.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.

The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.

120

왘

i

Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.

You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.

The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.

If you do not open a door after removing the key, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.

Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lamps delayed shut-off)
Use the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed.

To activate night security illumination:
왘

Select delayed shut-off period (see below).

왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.

Controls in detail
Control system
To select delayed shut-off period:
왘

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: HEADLAMPS DELAYED SHUT-OFF.

You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
왘

Before leaving the vehicle turn the key
in the starter switch to position 0.

왘

Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the key in the starter switch.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
key is removed from the starter switch.
왘

Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED SHUTOFF.

You can select:
앫

0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is

deactivated
앫

15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated

The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘

Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
앫

0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is

deactivated
앫

5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
shut-off feature is activated

121

Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.

Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
Function

Page

Set station selection mode
(radio)

see below

Set automatic locking

see
below

Setting station selection mode
Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
function to select the manual or memory
station selection mode for the radio
(컄 page 111).
왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the VEHICLE submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE.

122

The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Press æ or ç to select the desired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫

STATION SEARCH

앫

MEMORY selects next stored station

Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).

왘

Press æ or ç to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.

Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu

Warning!

Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Function

You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is activated and
the driver’s door is being opened or the key
is removed from the starter switch. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Page

Activate easy-entry/exit feature see
below
Set key dependency

124

Set parking position for exterior 124
rear view mirror

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature is activated, the steering wheel and
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you
앫

remove the key from the starter switch

앫

open the driver’s door

However, the engine must be turned off.

G

After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
앫

the driver’s door is closed

앫

you put the key in the starter switch
and

앫

press the appropriate stored position
button on the memory switch
(컄 page 94)

i
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
앫

Press the seat adjustment
switch*(컄 page 34).

앫

Move the steering column stalk*
(컄 page 38).

앫

Press the memory switch
(컄 page 94).

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

123

Controls in detail
Control system
Setting key dependency
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel and the mirrors should be stored
separately for each key (컄 page 93).
왘

Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
The following settings are available for
the easy-entry/exit feature:
OFF

STEERING COLUMN

왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.

The easy-entry/exit feature
is deactivated.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Only the steering column is
moved.

STEERING COLUMN + Both the steerSEAT
ing column and

the seat are
moved.

124

왘

Press æ or ç to set key dependency to ON or OFF.

Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers, when reverse gear is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position ”
(컄 page 140).
You can store a parking position for the
passenger exterior rear view mirror using
the memory switch (컄 page 95).
왘

Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING.

Controls in detail
Control system
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Fuel consumption statistics after start

Fuel consumption since last reset

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the multifunction display: AFTER START.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: After RESET.

Press æ or ç to switch function
ON or OFF.

Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function

Page

Fuel consumption statistics after see
start
below
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset

1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average fuel consumption since start
4 Average speed since start

1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last reset
4 Average speed since last reset

125

Call up range (distance to empty) 126

125

Controls in detail
Control system

i

Call up range (distance to empty)

All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the key in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

왘

Resetting will not occur if you turn the
key back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.

왘

Press and hold the reset knob in the instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until the
value is reset to 0.

126

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: RANGE.
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.

TEL menu*
Warning!

G

A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.

Controls in detail
Control system

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.

You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘

Switch on the telephone and
COMAND*.

왘

Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the display.

Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫

If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.

앫

If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the display.

This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

i
Vehicles with audio system:
In top right corner; the higher the number, the stronger the signal received
from the net.
Vehicles with COMAND:
In top left corner; the higher the number of bars, the stronger the signal received from the net.

1 Signal strength

127

Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call

Dialing a number from the phone book

i

When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:

If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.

If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.

왘

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.

왘

Press button j or k .
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!.

Press button í .
You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call.

Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.

왘

Press button í .
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫

If connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.

앫

If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in increasing or decreasing alphabetical order.

128

왘

When the message PLEASE WAIT! disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.

Ending a call
왘

Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.

Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.

왘

Press button í .
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.

왘

Press button í .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

129

Controls in detail
Manual transmission
Manual transmission
Information for driving with a manual
transmission is found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 41).

Warning!

G

For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, getting out of your vehicle with the
gearshift lever not engaged in 1st or reverse
gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged 1st or reverse gear alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects
Always set the parking brake in addition to
engaging 1st or reverse gear (컄 page 51).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheel towards the road curb.

Gearshift lever

Do not exceed the maximum speed in the
individual gears. Refer to tachometer
(컄 page 22) for engine speeds.

130

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the gearshift
lever, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.

Controls in detail
Manual transmission
!
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Shifting into reverse
왘

Stop the vehicle completely.

왘

Pull gearshift lever up and shift in
R reverse.

Do not exceed the engine speed limits
(컄 page 310).
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill
by using the clutch pedal. The clutch
may be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

131

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Automatic transmission*
Information for driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 41).
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting
process to your individual driving style by
continually adjusting the shift points up or
down. These shift point adjustments are
performed based on current operating and
driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.

i
During the brief warm-up the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows
the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperatures.

132

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on
앫

the selector lever position D with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 134)

앫

the selected shift program (W/S)
(컄 page 136)

앫

the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 137)

앫

the vehicle speed

The current selector lever position and
shift program (W/S) appear in the multifunction display (컄 page 22).
An additional indication of the current selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.

Warning!

G

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

When the selector lever is in position D,
you can influence transmission shifting by
앫

limiting the gear range

앫

changing gears yourself

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears yourself when the
selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘

Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 134).
Warning!

G

i

Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when
the selector lever is moved to the
D– direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.

왘

Upshifting
왘

Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.

Press and hold the selector lever in the
D+ direction until D reappears in the
tachometer display field.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘

Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.

The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

133

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear ranges
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the
lever to the right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
tachometer display field. If you press on
the accelerator when the engine has
reached its rpm limit, the transmission will
upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.

Gear
range

Effect

Gear
range

Effect

é

The transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.

ç

The transmission shifts
through second gear only.

è

The transmission shifts
through third gear only.

Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving

With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.

앫

on steep downgrades

앫

in mountainous regions

앫

under extreme operating
conditions

æ

The transmission operates
only in first gear
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.

134

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Gear selector lever position
Effect
P

N

Selector position when the vehicle is
parked. Only place selector lever in
position P when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the vehicle is
parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.

R

Reverse gear

!

Neutral

Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
can result in transmission damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).

Park position

The key can only be removed from
the starter switch with the selector
lever in position P. With the key removed the selector lever is locked in
position P.

Effect

To avoid damage to the transmission,
never engage N while driving.
If ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:
Only move selector lever to N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g.
on icy roads).
D

Drive
The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available.

Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 51).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.

Place selector lever in position R only
when vehicle is stopped.

135

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Warning!

G

Program mode selector switch

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the selector lever from position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.

왘

Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 105).
Select W for winter driving:

1 Program mode selector switch
S Standard

For regular driving

W Winter

For winter driving

앫

The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.

앫

Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.

앫

Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.

앫

The power transmission ratio for selector lever position R changes depending on the program mode
selected (W or S).

!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.

136

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle

Earlier upshifting

More throttle

Later upshifting

Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘

왘

Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘

Stop the vehicle.

왘

Move selector lever to P.

왘

Turn off the engine.

The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.

왘

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.

Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.

왘

Restart the engine.

왘

Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.

왘

Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.

The transmission shifts up again.

137

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 48) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄 page 39) is found in the “Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror, antiglare position
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position using the lever at its lower edge.

Automatic antiglare rear view mirror*

The rear view mirror will not react if

The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the inside rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when

앫

reverse gear is engaged

앫

the interior lighting is turned on

앫

the ignition is switched on, and

앫

incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the inside rear view mirror.

Warning!

The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sunshade is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.

138

G

Controls in detail
Good visibility

Warning!

G

In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

Warning!

G

Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.

139

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position

The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:

Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored positions.

앫

10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R

앫

immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)

앫

immediately when you press the button
for driver’s side mirror (컄 page 40)

왘

Make sure you stored a parking position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 95)

왘

Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING
WHEN PARKING function, found under
the CONVENIENCE submenu in the control system, is switched to ON
(컄 page 124).

Headlamp cleaning system*
The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.

1 Headlamp washer switch

왘

Switch on ignition.

왘

Switch on ignition.

왘

Press button 2 (컄 page 40) for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

왘

Press switch 1.

왘

Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R .
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward in the
stored position.

140

The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Information on filling up the washer reservoir can be found in the “Operation” section (컄 page 232).

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!

G

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘

Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.

1 Mounting
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Sun visor
왘

To use mirror, lift up cover 2.

i
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
The mirror lamp 3 will switch off.

141

Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control

142

Controls in detail
Climate control
Item

Item

1 Climate control panel

1 Air volume control

2 Left center air vent, adjustable

2 Left-side temperature control

3 Right center air vent, adjustable

3 Right-side temperature control

4 Air volume control for left center air
vent

4 Air distribution control switch

5 Air volume control for right center
air vent

6 AC cooling on/off

5 Rear window defroster

6 Air volume control for side air vent

7 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic)

7 Side air vent, adjustable

8 Air recirculation

8 Side defroster vent, fixed

9 Defrosting

i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.

Climate control panel

The storage compartment between the
front seats can be ventilated (컄 page 148).
Information about rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents
(컄 page 149).

143

Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.

144

The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄 page 148)
Warning!

G

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.

i
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature

Adjusting air distribution and volume

Use temperature controls 2 and 3 to separately adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

Use the air distribution control 4
(컄 page 143) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
controls:
Symbol

Function

a

Directs air through the
center, side and rear passenger compartment air
vents

Increasing
왘

Turn the control slightly to the right.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Decreasing
왘

Turn the control slightly to the left.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Z

Directs air to the windows

X

Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior

Y

Directs air to the footwells

Adjusting manually
왘

Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

왘

Select any of the six air volume speeds
using the air volume control 1
(컄 page 143) and the air distribution.

Adjusting automatically
왘

Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution and volume is adjusted automatically.

Windshield fogged on the outside
왘

Switch the windshield wipers on.

왘

Switch to manual mode.

왘

Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.

145

Controls in detail
Climate control
Defrosting

i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
왘

Press button P (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on
or

왘

Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
Press button O (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

왘

Close center air vents.

왘

Open left and right side air vents and
adjust side air vents upwards.

146

Activating

Deactivating
왘

Press button P (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.

Press button O (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

i

Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!

왘

G

When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.

If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and panorama sliding/pop-up roof will be closed.
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 148) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.

Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating
왘

The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.

i

Rear window defroster

Press button O (컄 page 143)

If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and panorama sliding/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫

after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)

앫

after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off

앫

after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)

The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating
왘

Press button F (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.

Deactivating
왘

Press button F (컄 page 143) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

Warning!

G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.

!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.

147

Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.

i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘

Press button ACOFF (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.

Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘

Press ACOFF again (컄 page 143).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF goes out.

The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

Ventilated storage compartment
The front center console storage compartment has its own air vent that allows for
cooling ventilation when the climate control system is activated.

i
You should keep this air vent closed
when outside temperatures are low.

!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air conditioning system is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
1 Lever

148

Controls in detail
Climate control
Opening the air vent
왘

Raise lever 1.

Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents

Closing the air vent
왘

Deactivating the climate control system
Deactivating

Lower lever 1.

왘

i
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.

!
Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment.

Set the air volume control
(컄 page 143) to position 0.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

Reactivating
1 Left center air vent
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
3 Right center air vent

왘

Set the air volume control
(컄 page 143) to any speed.

To open center air vents:
왘

Turn thumbwheel 2 upward.

i
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 3
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.

149

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)

150

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Item

Item

1 Automatic climate control panel

1 Temperature control, left, raising

2 Left center air vent, adjustable

2 Left-side air distribution control
(automatic or manual operation)

3 Right center air vent, adjustable
4 Air volume control for left center air
vent

3 Activated charcoal filter

5 Thumbwheel for adding outside air

5 Right-side air distribution control
(automatic or manual operation)

4 Display

6 Air volume control for right center
air vent

6 Temperature control, right, raising

7 Air volume control for side air vent

7 Temperature control, right, lowering

8 Side air vent, adjustable
9 Side defroster vent, fixed

i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.

Automatic climate control panel

8 Rear window defroster
9 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
Residual heat/ventilation
10 Air volume control
11 Automatic climate control on/off
(complete system)
12 Air recirculation
13 Defrosting
14 Temperature control, left, lowering

151

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the economy mode ACOFF mode
is selected (컄 page 151).
Warning!

G

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.

152

i

Increasing

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.

왘

The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 1 and 14 for the
left side or 6 and 7 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).

i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

Push temperature control 1 and/or 6.

Decreasing
왘

Push temperature control 7
and/or 14.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.

Adding outside air
왘

Turn thumbwheel 5 in dashboard
(컄 page 150) to increase flow of outside air through air vents for center, left
and right sides and rear passenger
compartment.

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution controls 2 and 5
(컄 page 151) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:

Adjusting manually
왘

Press left or right U button.
The air distribution can be adjusted
manually.

Adjusting automatically
왘

Function

a

Directs air through the
center, side and rear passenger compartment air
vents

Windshield fogged on the outside

Z

Directs air to the windows

왘

Switch the windshield wipers on.

X

Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior

왘

Switch to manual mode.

왘

Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.

Directs air to the footwells

Adjusting manually
Seven blower speeds are available.
왘

Press left or right U button again.

Symbol

Y

Adjusting air volume

The air distribution is adjusted automatically.

Press left M or right Q side of air
volume control switch until the requested blower speed is attained.
The display “Auto” disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.

Adjusting automatically
왘

Press left or right U button.
The air volume is adjusted automatically.

153

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display “AUTO MAXCOOL” appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof* are
closed).

Defrosting

i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Activating
왘

Press button P (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up

왘

Switch off air recirculation, if selected.

왘

Press button O (컄 page 151).

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!

Activating

왘

Close center air vents.

왘

왘

Adjust side air vents upwards.

왘

Press button P (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.

G

When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.

The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

Deactivating

154

Air recirculation mode

Press button O (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)

i

Deactivating

If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof will be closed.

왘

The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
앫

at high outside temperatures

앫

if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a
tunnel (charcoal filter activated)

The charcoal filter must be activated
(컄 page 156) for the air recirculation
mode to be activated automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 157) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.

Press button O (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

i
If you keep button O pressed the
side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.

The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫

after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)

앫

after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off

앫

after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)

At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.

155

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Charcoal filter
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘

Press button e (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.

The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level.

i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof* will be closed.

156

Deactivating
왘

Press button e (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof will be returned to
their previous position.

Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating

The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if economy mode ACOFF is selected or if the outside temperature has
fallen below 41°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.

왘

Press button F (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.

Deactivating
왘

Press button F (컄 page 151) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Warning!

G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.

Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.

i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.

!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.

Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘

Press button ACOFF (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.

Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘

Press ACOFF again (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF goes out.

The air conditioning system uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of
CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air conditioning system is losing refrigerant.
The compressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning system
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

157

Controls in detail
Automatic climate control* (Canada only)
Residual heat and ventilation*
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘

왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or remove it from the starter
switch.
Press button T (컄 page 151)
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.

Deactivating
왘

Press button T (컄 page 151).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes off.

The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫

when the ignition is switched on

158

앫

after about 30 minutes

앫

if the battery voltage drops

1 Left center air vent

i

2 Thumbwheel

How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.

3 Right center air vent

Item

4 Air vent, closed
5 Air vent, opened
6 Blower
Adjusting the air volume

Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents

왘

Turn thumbwheel 2.

i
Four blower speeds are available.
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 3
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation

Operating safety

These instructions are intended to help
you become acquainted with your
Mercedes-Benz car radio. They contain
useful tips and a detailed description of the
user functions.
Warning!

G

In order to avoid distraction which could
lead to an accident, system settings should
be entered with the vehicle at standstill and
systems should be operated by the driver
only when traffic conditions permit. Always
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
before operating system controls while driving.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of approximately 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.1
1

Warning!

G

Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer*, telephone* and voice control system* are interconnected. When one of the components is
not operational or has not been
removed/replaced properly, the function of
other components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The right to correct errors and make technical
amendments is reserved.

159

Controls in detail
Audio system
Operating and display elements

160

Controls in detail
Audio system
Item

Page

Item

Page

Item

1 CD mode selector

172

5 Alpha-numeric keypad

2 Manual tuning
(radio)

166

Band selection,
station buttons (radio)

165

10 Cassette mode selector

168

170,
174

CD selection (CD)

173

11 Telephone* mode selector

176

Fast forward/reverse
(cassette, CD)

12 Seek tuning (radio)

166

179

Telephone number entry,
retrieving speed dialing
memory (telephone*)

176

Speed dialing memory
(telephone*)
3 Radio mode selector
4 Display

165

9 Cassette eject

Page

6 Scanning (radio, cassette, CD)

167,
170,
174

7 Function button

166

8 Soft keys

162

169

Track search (cassette,
CD)

169,
174

Speed dialing memory
(telephone*)

179

13 On /off

162

Volume

162

161

Controls in detail
Audio system
Button and soft key operation
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric
keypad (right side of radio face) and the
function buttons (left side of the radio
face) are referred to as “buttons” and the
four keys under the display are referred to
as “soft keys”.

Operation

왘

왘

Switching on:
왘

Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the
starter switch.
or

왘

Turn control knob a.

162

If your vehicle was equipped with a
telephone* and voice control system*,
and both are connected to the car radio, their volume can be adjusted separately while the telephone* is being
used or voice control system* is activated.

Remove the key from the starter
switch.
or

Adjusting audio functions

Turn control knob a.

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press the
AUD key to call up the bass, treble, balance and fader functions.

Adjusting the volume
왘

Switching on/off

i

If the radio is turned on without the key
in the ignition, it will automatically turn
off again after approx. 30 minutes.
Switching off:

i
Do not press directly on the radio display face.

i

Turn control knob a.
The volume will increase or decrease
according to the direction turned.

Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM (medium wave, long
wave, short wave) and FM (ultra-short
wave) frequency bands, cassette mode
and CD mode.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Bass
왘

왘

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BASS appears on the display.

Press the + or - key to increase or decrease the tone level accordingly.

Treble
왘

왘

or
왘

Press both the + and - keys simultaneously to reset the bass tones to the
center (flat) level.

Fader

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE appears on the display.

i
Your vehicle may or may not have the
fader function, depending on the vehicle equipment and model.
왘

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until FADER appears on the display.

왘

Press the F or R key to shift the sound
accordingly.

Press the + or - key to increase or decrease the tone level accordingly.
or

왘

Press both the + and - keys simultaneously to reset the treble tones to
their center (flat) level.

or
왘

Press both the F and R keys simultaneously to reset the fader to its center
level.

163

Controls in detail
Audio system
Balance
왘

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE
appears on the display.

Returning audio functions to factory settings

Press the L or R key to shift the sound
accordingly.
or

왘

Press both the L and R keys simultaneously to reset the balance to its center level.

왘

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
the AUD key.
The sound settings menu appears on
the display.

왘
왘

Audio system sound selection (EXT)*

In radio, cassette and CD mode, press
and hold the AUD key longer than 2 seconds. RESET will appear on the display.
All settings for bass, treble and balance
are returned to center and the volume
is set to a predefined level.

왘

Press the EXT key.

왘

Press one of the function keys.
You can select from among the following settings:
앫

164

DRV: The tone level is set to the
“Driver” position, sound is directed
toward the passengers.

Controls in detail
Audio system
앫

SP: The tone level is set for

“Speech”, optimizing the sound for
spoken language.
앫

AMB: The tone level is set for “Ambi-

ence”, producing a three-dimensional sound.
앫

OFF: The audio system sound selec-

tion is turned off.
Telephone* muting
If a telephone has been installed in the vehicle, the radio will switch to telephone
mode when a call is received. The current
audio source is muted.

Radio mode

Selecting FM band
왘

Selecting radio mode
왘

Press the FM function button.
FM appears in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

Press the b button.

Selecting the band

Selecting AM band

You can select from among FM, AM or WB
frequency bands.

왘

AM appears in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

FM frequency band:
FM (ultra-short wave) 87.9......107.9 MHz
AM frequency bands:
MW (medium wave) 530......1710 KHz
WB (long wave) approx. 162 KHz

Press the AM function button.

Selecting a station
The following options are available for selecting a station:
앫

Direct frequency band input

앫

Manual tuning

앫

Automatic seek tuning

앫

Scan tuning

앫

Station buttons

앫

Automatic station memory (Autostore)

165

Controls in detail
Audio system
Automatic seek tuning

Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)

Manual tuning

Select the desired frequency band.

왘

Select the desired band.

왘

Select the desired frequency band.

왘

Press and hold either the d or c
button until the desired frequency is
reached.

왘

Press either the f or e button.

왘

Press the “ button.

왘

Enter the desired frequency with the
buttons 1 to 0.

i
You can only enter frequencies within
the respective waveband.
If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the radio will return to the last
tuned station.

166

Step-by-step station tuning takes place
in ascending or descending order of
frequency. The first three tuning steps
will take place without muting. Afterward, the radio will be muted and
high-speed tuning will take place until
the button is released.

The radio will tune to the next receivable station at a higher or lower frequency.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Scan tuning
앫

Starting scan tuning
왘

왘

Select the desired frequency band.

Ending scan tuning
왘

Press the 2 button or the d,
c, f or e button.
SC disappears from the display.

앫

You can store 10 AM and 10 FM stations.
앫

왘

Tune in the desired station.

왘

Press and hold the desired station
button 1 to 0 until a brief signal
tone is heard.
The frequency is stored on the selected station button.

앫

Calling up the Autostore memory level
왘

Storing stations

Press the 2 button.
SC will appear on the display. The
radio briefly tunes into all receivable stations on the band selected.
The first scan will tune only the stations with a strong signal. The second scan will tune every receivable
station.

앫

Station memory

Retrieving a station from memory
왘

Press the desired station button 1
to 0.

Storing stations automatically
(Autostore)
The Autostore memory function provides
an additional memory level. The station
memory for manually stored stations is not
erased.

Briefly press the AS key.
AS appears on the display in in-

versed-color format.
The radio finds the 10 stations with
the strongest signals. These stations are stored on the station buttons 1 to 0 in the order of signal
strength.
앫

Retrieving a station from memory
왘

앫

Press the desired station button 1
to 0.

Leaving the Autostore memory level
왘

Press the AS key.
AS appears on the display in in-

versed-color format.

167

Controls in detail
Audio system
Weather band
왘

Playing cassettes
왘

Select the desired weather band station with buttons 1 to 7.
If a station cannot be tuned in, a scan
is automatically started.

왘

왘

Press the WB key.
The last weather band station is tuned
in.

왘

Cassette mode

Press the f or e button. The
next receivable weather band station is
tuned in.

Press the 3 button.

A warning signal will sound after 20
seconds if the display is left in the
down position. If the display is not
closed, a warning signal will sound and
the radio will be muted.

Press the cassette into the slot until it
engages and tap it gently.
The cassette will be pulled in automatically. The system switches to cassette
mode (TAPE). Track 1 will be played and
SIDE 1 appears in the display. Track 1
is the side of the cassette which is facing upward. The cassette deck will automatically detect the type of tape.

왘

Do not press directly on the display
face.
or

Track selection

왘

Press the TRK key.
Upon selection of the track, the display
shows SIDE 1 or SIDE 2 correspondingly.

Fold the display back up and press gently on the display frame to lock in place.

i

168

i

The display folds down and the cassette slot becomes visible.
왘

If a cassette is already in the mechanism, press the j button.

왘

You can switch track sides at any time.
The track side will be changed automatically at the end of the tape.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Cassette eject
왘

Press the eject button 3.
The display will fold down and the cassette will be ejected. The system will
switch back to radio mode automatically.

왘

Fold the display back up.

i
The cassette will not be ejected when
the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.

Track search

i

Track search forward

The cassette will not be ejected when
the system is switched off or switched
to another operating mode.
Track search backward

왘

Press the f button.

왘

Press the e button.
SEEK RWD will appear on the display.
The track search will run the tape backward to the start of the track currently
playing and switch to play.

SEEK FWD will appear in the display. The

track search will run the tape forward
to the start of the next track and switch
to play.

Stopping track search
왘

Press the d, c, f or e
button.
The cassette will switch over to Play.

169

Controls in detail
Audio system
Scanning

Fast forward/reverse
Starting cassette fast forward mode:

Stopping the cassette fast forward/reverse mode:
왘

왘

Each track on the cassette will be
played briefly in ascending order.
Stopping scan:
왘

The cassette will switch over to the
play mode.

Press the 2 button.
SC will appear on the display.

Press the 2, d, c, f or
e button.
The system will switch to Play.

170

Press the d, c, f or e
button.

왘

Press the d button.
FORWARD will appear on the display.

Starting cassette fast reverse mode:
왘

Press the c button.
REWIND will appear on the display.

The cassette will automatically switch over
to the play mode at the end or beginning of
the tape.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping blank sections (skip blank)
Switching on the skip blank function

Dolby NR1 (noise reduction system)

Switching off

To enable optimum sound reproduction of
cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR1, the
Dolby NR1 system should be switched on.

왘

Press the NR key again.
The inversed-color NR display disapears.

i
왘

The Dolby NR1 function should be
switched off when playing cassettes
not recorded with Dolby B NR1.

Press the SB key.
SB appears on the display in in-

versed-color format.
If the system does not detect a sound
signal, the cassette will automatically
fast forward to the next sound signal.

Switching on
왘

NR appears on the display in in-

versed-color format.

Switching off the skip blank function
왘

Press the NR key.

Press the SB key.
The inversed-color SB display disappears.
1

DOLBY and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.

171

Controls in detail
Audio system
CD changer* operating mode
General notes
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and muting will take
place. The unit will then switch back to the
last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any label or other material to them.
Use only original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.

172

Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be
used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its
case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
direct sunlight.

Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard (IEC 60908).
Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.

Warning!

G

The CD changer* is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer*
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.

Operational readiness of CD changer
If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the front
control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must be installed for CD playing.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
왘

Slide the changer door to the right and
press the eject button 3.

왘

The magazine will be ejected.

컄컄

Controls in detail
Audio system

i

Selecting CDs

CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
왘

1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
왘

Remove the magazine and pull the CD
tray fully out.

왘

Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
label side up.

왘

Push the tray into the magazine in the
direction shown by the arrow.

Push the magazine into the CD changer
in the direction shown by the arrow and
close the sliding door.

Playing CDs
왘

Press the i button.
CD will appear on the display.

The CD most recently listened to will then
start playing at the point where it was last
switched off.
After the last track on a CD has finished,
the next CD is automatically played.

왘

You can select from among the CDs in
the CD magazine using buttons 1 to 6.
CD and the magazine slot number of the
selected CD appear on the display. The
number of the current track is displayed after TRACK.

If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears on the display
with the corresponding slot number.

173

Controls in detail
Audio system
Skipping tracks forward/backward

Fast forward/reverse

Scanning

Skipping tracks forward:

Fast forward:

Starting scan:

왘

Press the f button.

왘

The next track will be played.
Skipping tracks backward:
왘

Press the e button.
If the track has been playing for more
than 10 seconds, it will revert to the
start of that track. If it has been playing
for less than 10 seconds, it will revert
to the preceding track.

Repeated pressing of the f or e
button will result in multiple tracks being
skipped.

174

Press and hold the d button until
the desired location has been reached.

왘

SC appears in the display.

Reverse:
왘

Press the 2 button.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approx. 8 seconds in ascending order.

Press and hold the c button until
the desired location has been reached.

i

Ending scan:

The relative time of the track is shown
on the display during search.

왘

Press the 2 button, d, c,
f or e button.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Random play

Repeat

The random play function (RDM) plays the
tracks on the current CD in random order.

The repeat function (RPT) repeats the current track.

Switching on random play:

Switching on repeat:

Track and time display

왘

왘

Press the RDM key.

RPT appears on the display in in-

versed-color format.

versed-color format.

Press the RDM key again.
The inversed-color RDM display disappears.

Switching off repeat:
왘

The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in
the display.

Press the RPT key.

RDM appears on the display in in-

Switching off random play:
왘

왘

Press the RPT key again.
The inversed-color RPT display disappears.

Press the T key.

왘

Press the T key again.
The total number of tracks and the total
playing time of the CD appear in the
display.
The CD main menu appears again after
8 seconds.

i
The Random play and Repeat function
cannot be used simultaneously.

175

Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone* operation
Various car telephone functions and operating steps for the car telephone can be
performed and displayed via the audio system.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel,
voice control system* and the car telephone.
Switching on the telephone
왘

Press the h button.

왘

If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must input
the code now.

왘

Press the OK key.
The telephone is unlocked. If you enter
the wrong code, you must re-enter the
correct code.

176

Switching off the telephone
왘

Press the h button repeatedly until
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
The receiving symbol in the display disappears.

Placing a call
Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process

Adjusting the volume
왘

Turn control knob a during telephone operation.

왘

The volume increases or decreases depending on the direction in which the
knob is turned.

i

Enter the desired telephone number
using buttons 1 to 0.
The number can have up to 32 digits,
but only 17 of these are visible on the
display.

왘

If necessary, correct the number entered with the CLR key. Press the key
briefly to delete the last digit entered,
press the key and hold to delete the
complete number.

왘

After the correct telephone number
has been entered, press the SND key.

The volume can be adjusted separately
for the telephone, voice control
system* and radio.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Telephone book
The numbers stored in the telephone book
can be called up by either name or number.

Searching and calling up telephone book
entries by name

Press either the d, c, f or
e button.

Switching between name search and
number search

Press the ABC key.
The name search is called up.

Press the f or e button.

or
왘

Press the ABC key.
The current name is marked on the display.

왘

Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected according to alphabetical order of initial letters.

왘

왘

The stored entries are selected in increments of 4.

Calling up the telephone book
왘

or

왘

Press the desired numerical key 2 to 9.
The stored entries are selected according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g.
for B -Brown, press button 2 twice).

i
A number of characters and symbols
cannot be shown on the display for
technical reasons, they have been replaced with spaces.

or

왘

Press the NUM key.
The number search is called up.

177

Controls in detail
Audio system
Searching and selecting telephone book
entries by number

왘

Press the NUM key.

Repeat dialing

Automatic repeat dialing (redial)

If, for example, the number dialed is busy,
you can again place calls to the last 10
telephone numbers dialed using the repeat
dialing function.

If a call cannot be connected, press the SND
key.

Manual repeat dialing (redial)

The current number is marked in the
display.
왘

Press either the d or c button.
The stored entries are selected according to numerical order.

왘

Press the f or e button.

왘

Select the desired telephone number
using the d, c, f or e
button.
The abbreviation L and the number of
the entry are shown in the top line of
the display.

Starting dialing process
Once you have selected a number,
press the SND key.

Press the SND key.
The last number dialed is shown in the
display.

The stored entries are selected in increments of 4 (e.g. Entry M1, Entry M5,
etc.).

왘

peated attempts to place the call will be
made for the next 4 minutes.
Quick dialing

or
왘

REDIAL will appear on the display and re-

왘

When you have selected a number,
press the SND key.
The call will then be placed.

178

왘

Enter the previously selected 3-digit
(1-999) number of the entry using the
number keys 1 to 0.

왘

Press the RCL key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed.

왘

Press the SND key.
The call will be placed.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Speed dialing
왘

Input the desired entry number using
the number keys 1 to 0.
A maximum of 2 digits can be entered.
If necessary, correct the last number
entered with the CLR key.

왘

Press the SND key.
The telephone number stored under
that entry will be dialed. The number, L
and the full entry number will be shown
in the display.

Express dialing
왘

Press one of the desired number buttons 1 to 0 longer than one second.
The telephone number saved under
that number will be dialed.

!
Please be aware that button 1 might already be reserved for an emergency
call number.

Emergency call
왘

Press button 1 longer than one second.

왘

A call will be placed to the saved number (e.g. 911).

!
Please be aware that the 911 emergency call system is a public service. Using
it without due cause is a criminal offense.
You can make an emergency call to an
emergency rescue station with a mobile
communications network.
The emergency call will be placed as long
as the corresponding mobile communications network is available. To do this,
switch the telephone on if not already done
so.

Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions
are active. Check with your local network
operation company. It may take some time
to set up an emergency call.
To use this function you must ensure that
the number stored in memory location 1 is
the number to be dialed in case of emergency.

If an emergency call cannot be connected,
the message SYSTM BUSY appears.

The call will also be placed if the unlock-code is not entered.

179

Controls in detail
Audio system
Accepting an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call in telephone
mode
With an incoming call, a ringing tone can
be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the
telephone book, appear on the display. If
the caller’s number is not transmitted,
CALL will appear in the display.
왘

Press the SND key to accept the call.

Accepting an incoming call in cassette,
CD or radio mode
If the telephone is activated in the background (receiving symbol S visible on display), the audio source is muted when a
call is received. The ringing tone is heard
and the caller’s telephone number or the
name under which this telephone number
has been saved in the telephone book appear on the display. If the caller’s number
is not transmitted, CALL appears in the display.
왘

180

Press the SND key to accept the call.

Muting a call
It is possible to silence a call, the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.
Muting
왘

Press the MUT key.

Unmuting
왘

Press the MUT key again.

Terminating a call
왘

Press the END key.

왘

The current call is disconnected.

Controls in detail
Audio system
Call waiting

Accepting a second call

If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.

왘

Press the SND key.
You are connected with the second
caller, the first call is muted.

Terminating the second call
왘

Press the END key.
The current call will be terminated. You
are connected with the muted call
again.

Switching between the calls
왘

Press the SND key again.

181

Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switch for the front passenger side is on
the front passenger door.

1 Left front window
2 Right front window

182

Warning!

G

When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch, or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling the
switch and holding it there, or by pressing
and holding the button ‹ on the SmartKey, the automatic reversal function will not
operate.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘

Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

Opening the windows
왘

Press switch to resistance point.
The window will move downwards until
you release the switch.

Closing the windows
왘

Pull on switch to resistance point.
The window will move upwards until
you release the switch.

Controls in detail
Power windows
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms,
hands, fingers etc., the automatic reversal
will not operate.
Fully opening windows
왘

Stopping windows

The window opens completely.

왘

Pull switch past resistance point and
release.
The window closes completely.

If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.

G

Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds you again pull the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.

Press switch past resistance point and
release.

Fully closing windows
왘

Warning!

Press or pull respective switch again.

i
You can also open or close the windows using the:
앫

SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature), see below

앫

button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄 page 143)

Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof will also
be opened or closed when you operate the
power windows with the key.
Warning!

G

Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘

Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.

183

Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘

Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.

Closing (Convenience feature)
왘

The windows and panorama sliding/pop-up roof begin to open after approximately one second.
왘

Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.

Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and panorama sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after
approximately one second.

왘

Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.

Ensure that all side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
closed before leaving the vehicle.

184

Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchronized each time after the battery has been
disconnected:
왘

Pull the power window switches until
the side windows are closed and hold
the switches for approximately one
second.

Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the sunshades for
the panorama sliding/pop-up roof

Opening and closing the sunshades
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

왘

To open or close the sunshades, move
the switch to resistance point in the required direction.
Release the switch when the sunshades have reached the required position.

Stopping the sunshades
왘

Move the switch in any direction.

Warning!

G

When closing the sunshades, make sure
that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.

Opening the sunshades automatically
1 To open sunshade
2 To close sunshade
3 To open sunshade
4 To close sunshade

왘

Move the switch past resistance point
in direction 1 and release.

The sunshades only operate with panorama sliding/pop-up roof closed.

185

Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the panorama sliding/pop-up roof

Warning!

G

When closing the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof, make sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

Opening and closing the panorama sliding/pop-up roof
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

왘

To open, close, raise or lower the panorama sliding/pop-up roof, move the
switch to resistance point in the required direction.

The closing procedure of the panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately reversed by either pressing or pulling the
switch, or pressing button Πon the key
and holding it.

1 Push back to slide roof open
2 Push forward to slide roof closed
3 Push up to raise roof at rear
4 Pull down to lower roof at rear
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof only operates with the sunshades opened.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Release the switch when the roof has
reached the required position.
Opening the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof automatically
왘

Move the switch past resistance point
in direction 1 and release.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof will
not open completely.

왘

Press the switch again to open it completely.

Stopping the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof
왘

186

Move the switch in any direction.

Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*

i

!

You can also open or close the panorama sliding/pop-up roof using the:

To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof.

앫

SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature), see below

앫

button O in the control panel of
the climate control (컄 page 143)

Opening and closing the panorama sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey
The power windows will also be opened or
closed when you operate the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof with the key.

Open the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof only if the roof is clear of snow or
ice.

Warning!

The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can
be opened or closed manually should
an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 278).

Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.

G

In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘

Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.

187

Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘

Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.

Closing (Convenience feature)
왘

The panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts
and the windows begin to open after
approximately one second.
왘

왘

Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and panorama sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after
approximately one second.

With the windows fully open, press and
hold button Πagain.

왘

The panorama sliding/pop-up roof begins to slide open after approximately
one second.

Ensure that all side windows and the panorama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
closed before leaving the vehicle.

Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.

188

Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.

Synchronizing the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof must be
resynchronized each time after the battery
has been disconnected, the panorama sliding/pop-up roof has been closed manually
or the panorama sliding/pop-up roof does
not open smoothly or malfunctions
(컄 page 279).

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages:
앫

Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed

The BAS, ABS and ESP driving systems are
described in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 73).

Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.

Warning!

G

Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, the traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.

앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.

앫

Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

189

Controls in detail
Driving systems

i

!

On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.

Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at previously set speed
Saving current speed
왘

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.

왘

Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.

왘

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.

190

왘

Step on the brake pedal.

or
왘

Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.

i
Vehicles with manual transmission:
The set cruise controlled speed is
switched off when declutching exceeds
four seconds during downshifting a
gear.

i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed

Setting stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!

왘

Release the cruise control lever.

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.

i
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

The new speed is set.

i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.

Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
previously set speed.

왘

Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.

G

The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘

왘

Setting a lower speed
왘

Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.

왘

Release the cruise control lever.

Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.

Slower
왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.

The new speed is set.

191

Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack*

Luggage cover

Split folding rear bench seat
The two sections can be folded down separately to enlarge the trunk.
Warning!

G

When expanding the luggage compartment,
always fold the seat cushions fully forward.

Mount the roof rack only between the fastening points 1 and in the recess of the
rubber strip 2.
Warning!

G

Use only those roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Removal
왘

Take off securing straps 1.

왘

Pull cover towards rear 2.

Installation
왘

Place cover into holder.

왘

Attach securing straps to trunk lid.

!
Do not place anything on the luggage
cover below the rear window.

192

Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.

Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward

왘

Pull release lever 3 and fold backrest 4
forward.

Folding the backrest rearward

Warning!

G

If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended cargo compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.

왘

Fold the backrest rearward until it engages.

If the backrest is not locked into position,
a red indicator 1 will be visible.

왘

Pull release handle 1.

왘

Fold seat cushion 2 forward.

왘

Fully retract and fold down head restraints

왘

Check for secure locking by pushing
and pulling on the backrest.

왘

Fold the seat cushion rearward until it
locks into position.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.

193

Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions

The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible since it influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
Warning!

G

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.

194

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!

Glove box

i
Prior to closing the glove box, close the
compartment for glasses first.

G

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the luggage
cover below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.

Locking the glove box
왘

Insert mechanical key into the glove
box lock and turn it to position 4.

Unlocking the glove box
1 Glove box
2 Glove box lid release

왘

Turn mechanical key in the glove box
lock to position 3.

Opening the glove box
왘

Pull lid release 2.
The glove box lid opens downward.

Closing the glove box
왘

Push lid up to close.

195

Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front of armrest

Cup holder
Warning!

Opening cup holder

G

When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.

Opening
왘

Slide cover 1 rearward.
The compartment contains a cigarette
lighter (컄 page 199), a coin holder, and
a cup holder.

Closing
왘

Slide cover 1 forward.

196

왘

Slide cover rearward.

왘

Push button 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing cup holder

Armrest storage spaces

Changing inclination of armrest
왘

Pull up on armrest.

Lowering armrest
왘

Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.

i
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled.
왘

Push in direction of arrow until cup
holder engages.

Opening compartment in armrest
왘

Lift armrest 3 by handle 2.

Opening compartment under armrest
왘

The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent (컄 page 148)
while heating the passenger compartment.

Lift armrest 3 by handle 1.

Closing
왘

Lower armrest until it engages in lock.

197

Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning!

Ashtrays
Center console ashtray

Warning!

G

Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.

G

Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants.

Removing ashtray insert

왘

Now you have more room to take out
the insert.

Opening ashtray
왘

Briefly touch cover plate 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.

Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the selector lever to position N.

왘

Slide ashtray insert in direction of
arrow 2 until it disengages.

왘

Grip ashtray at indents (arrows 3) and
remove insert from ashtray frame.

Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘

198

Install insert by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear seat ashtray

Cigarette lighter

Warning!

G

Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.

Opening ashtray
왘

Pull at top of cover 2 to open ashtray.

1 Cigarette lighter
2 Cover
왘

Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

왘

Slide cover 2 rearward.

왘

Push in cigarette lighter 1.

Removing ashtray insert
왘

Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray insert and remove it.

Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘

Install ashtray insert.

왘

Close the ashtray.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

i
The cigarette lighter socket can be
used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.

199

Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!

Warning!

G

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

200

G

Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1

Observe all legal requirements.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.

You can take and place telephone calls using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 126).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Warning!

G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid*

!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning key
in starter switch to position 2 and the
message TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED
will be shown in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

The Tele Aid system

i

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

The SOS button is located above the inside rear view mirror.

The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:

The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover.

앫

automatic and manual emergency

앫

roadside assistance and

앫

information

The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç .
왘

To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.

Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.

!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

201

Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! appears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.

Warning!

G

If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message TELE AID defective – VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in
the multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫

following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy

앫

if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 78)and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 79)

An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled “SOS”, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL
– CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is
established, the message EMERGENCY CALL
– CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi-

202

Controls in detail
Useful features
function display. All information relevant to
the emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.

The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫

앫

it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center

i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.

Warning!

G

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approx. 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

203

Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually

1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘

Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.

왘

Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in the SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.

왘

Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.

왘

Close cover 1 after the emergency call
is concluded.

204

Warning!

G

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘

Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).

Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display.
왘

Describe the nature of the need for assistance.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.

These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫

앫

Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.

i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turning the key in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the “SOS”
button and the Information
button ¡).

See system self-check (컄 page 202)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the
multifunction steering wheel.

205

Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button ¡.
왘

Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Infor-

206

mation regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.

See System self-check (컄 page 202)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.

For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message INFO –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.

i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning key in the
starter switch to position 2 (together
with the “SOS” button and the Roadside Assistance button •).

Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Controls in detail
Useful features
!

Upgrade signals

!

If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.

If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.

앫

Automatic emergency – First priority

앫

Manual emergency – Second priority

앫

Roadside assistance – Third priority

앫

Information – Fourth priority

Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND* system operation will
resume.

i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunction steering wheel.

207

Controls in detail
Useful features

i

Remote door unlock

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system or the COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If you must use this
phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the
call. The COMAND* navigation system
(if engaged) will continue to run. The
display in the instrument cluster is
available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit.
A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND* display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.

In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the
reserve key is not handy:
왘

왘

i

Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.

You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.

The “SOS” button will flash and the
message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.

Then return to your vehicle and pull the
trunk lid recessed handle for minimum
of 20 seconds until the “SOS” button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.

208

The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk lid recessed handle was
pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the trunk lid recessed handle again.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘

Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.

왘

Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
objects.

G

When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control make sure there is no possibility of
anyone being injured by the moving door.

Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.

Warning!

i

1

Indicator lamp

2, 3, 4

Signal transmitter key

5

Hand-held remote control transmitter

Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

209

Controls in detail
Useful features

i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫

This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

앫

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

210

Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
왘

Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.

왘

Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the
inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.

왘

Using both hands, simultaneously push
the hand-held transmitter button and
the desired integrated remote control
button. Do not release the buttons until
completing next step.

왘

The indicator lamp on the integrated
remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
lamp indicates successful programming of the new frequency signal.

왘

When the indicator lamp flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

왘

To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the above steps.

i
If, after several attempts, you do not
successfully program the integrated remote control device to learn the signal
of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature”.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
왘

Locate training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to garage door
opener operator’s manual.

왘

You have 30 seconds time to initiate the
following step.
왘

Firmly press and release the programmed integrated remote control
transmit button.

왘

Press and release same button a second time to complete the training process.

Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
왘

Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmitter.

Canadian programming
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting.
왘

Continue to press and hold the integrated remote control transmitter button (refer to steps two through four in
the “Programming” portion) while you
press and re-press (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has
been learned.
Upon successful training, the indicator
lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.

Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.

211

Controls in detail
Useful features
Operating the remote control

Erasing the remote control memory

왘

Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

왘

Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.

왘

Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote controlled
device.

왘

Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
blinks rapidly.

The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.

The codes of all three channels are
erased.

i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.

Pre-production photograph 왘

212

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

213

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫

Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

앫

During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).

앫

Changes gears in a timely manner.

앫

Avoid accelerating by kick-down.

앫

Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.

앫

Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).

After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instuctions also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced.

i
Always obey applicable speed limits.

214

Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫

Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures

앫

Remove unnecessary loads

앫

Remove roof rack when not in use

앫

Allow engine to warm up under low
load use

앫

Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration

앫

Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center

Drinking and driving
Warning!

Pedals

G

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.

Warning!

G

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is sharply increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
drugs.

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.

215

Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!

G

When the engine is not running, the brake
and steering systems are without power assistance. Under these circumstances, a
much greater effort is necessary to stop or
steer the vehicle

Brakes
Warning!

G

After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.

216

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.

!

It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 74).

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.

Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.

If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Operation
Driving instructions

Warning!

G

If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.

!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.

Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow one wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing
so may cause serious damage to the drive
train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.

Parking

!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move selector lever to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).
In addition, when parking on hills, turn
front wheel towards the curb

Warning!

G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

217

Operation
Driving instructions

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

앫

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

앫

Move the selector lever to position P
(manual transmission: first or reverse
gear).

앫

Slowly release brake pedal.

앫

When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel against curb.

앫

Turn the key to starter switch
position 0.

앫

Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.

Tires
Warning!

G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!

G

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
As tread depth approaches 1/16 in
(1.5 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet
road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.

218

Operation
Driving instructions
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!

G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Tire traction

Tire speed rating

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!

G

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.

Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance as
compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with
snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.

Warning!

G

Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130
mph (210 km/h)

219

Operation
Driving instructions
Information on tire speed rating for winter
tires (컄 page 236).
Vehicles without Evolution Package
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h) or optional
“V”-rated tires which have a speed rating
of 150 mph (240 km/h) or optional
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).
Vehicles with Evolution Package
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h).

Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move selector lever to position N or in
case of manual transmission declutch. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

i
Information on driving with snow
chains (컄 page 237).
Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

220

Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
We therefore recommend depressing the
brake pedal periodically when traveling at
length on salt-strewn roads.
This can bring road salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful
that you carry out these braking maneuvers without endangering any other road
users.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.

Operation
Driving instructions

Warning!

G

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind

Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.

For more information on winter driving
(컄 page 236).

Standing water

!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Passenger compartment
Warning!

G

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

Driving abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

221

Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio transmitter

Warning!
COMAND*, radio and telephone*
Warning!

G

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1

Observe all legal requirements

222

Catalytic converter

Telephones and two-way radios

G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.

!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.

Operation
Driving instructions

Warning!

G

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.

Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly

according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
Warning!

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.

The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!

G

앫

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

앫

Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near
the vehicle until it cools down.

Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approx. 248°F
(120°C).

223

Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Warning!

G

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!

The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

왘

Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.

왘

Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.

Warning!

왘

Remove the key from the starter
switch.

왘

Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
왘

The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘

224

Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.

G

Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.

왘

Close the fuel filler flap.

Operation
At the gas station

i

Check regularly and before a long trip

Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.

More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Operation” section
(컄 page 227).
Opening hood see (컄 page 226).

More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.

i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 250).

Engine oil level

Coolant

1 Coolant level
More information on the coolant level
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄 page 229).
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 317).
Removing fuse box cover see page
(컄 page 303).
3 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
For more information on refilling the
reservoir, see the “Operation” section
(컄 page 232).

For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). More information on
coolant can be found in the“Operation”
section (컄 page 229).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 280).
Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 96).
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflation pressure
can be found in the “Operation” section
(컄 page 234).

225

Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!

!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.

G

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.

왘

Pull lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked. At the same time
a handle will extend out of the radiator
grill.

226

The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.

G

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.

2 Handle for opening the hood

왘

Open the hood (do not pull up on the
handle) and then release it.

Warning!

Opening

1 Hood release

왘

Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grill

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.

Operation
Engine compartment

Warning!

G

If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.

Warning!

G

The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫

with the engine running

앫

while starting the engine

앫

if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually

Closing
Warning!

Engine oil

G

Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘

왘

The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫

the vehicle is new

Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

앫

the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

The hood will lock audibly.

Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.

Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.

Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫

be parked on level ground

앫

be at normal operating temperature

앫

have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off

227

Operation
Engine compartment
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
왘

Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2.

The standard display showing the trip
odometer and the main odometer
(컄 page 105) should appear in the multifunction display.
왘

Press button k or j, on the
steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - MEASUREMENT IN
PROCESS! CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY
IF VEH. LEVEL

After about three seconds this message is displayed:

Adding engine oil

ENGINE OIL LEVEL-MEASURING NOW

One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:
앫

ENGINE OIL LEVEL - O.K.

앫

ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 1 QUART
(1.o LITER)!

앫

ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 1.5
QUARTS (1.5 LITERS)!

앫

ENGINE OIL LEVEL - ADD 2.0
QUARTS (2.0 LITERS)!

1 Filler neck
왘

Unscrew the cap from filler neck 1. Be
careful not to overfill with oil.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.

!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
컄컄
Warranty.

228

Operation
Engine compartment
왘

gine is not yet at normal operating temperature, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.

Screw the cap back on the filler neck.

Other display messages
If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - REDUCE OIL LEVEL
왘

Have excess oil siphoned.

If the key is not turned to position 2 in the
starter switch:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL IGNITION ON
PLEASE!
왘

Switch on the ignition.

If you see the message:
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
왘

Wait five minutes before repeating
check procedure.

If a proper oil level check cannot be performed, the following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - MASURING NOT POSSIBLE
왘

Repeat the engine oil level check after
a short while.

See “Practical hints” (컄 page 262) if an engine oil level indicator appears on the display when the engine is running.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 317).

Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.

If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL - NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
왘

Turn off the engine. If engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five
minutes before checking oil. If the en-

229

Operation
Engine compartment

Warning!

The coolant level is correct if the level

G

앫

for cold coolant: reaches the black
top part of the reservoir

앫

for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher

In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫

앫

Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194×F (90×C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.

앫

Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.

앫

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

230

1 Coolant expansion tank
왘

Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.

왘

Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.

왘

Add coolant as required.

왘

Replace and tighten cap.

More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” (컄 page 321)

Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.

all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
G Observe
E
automotive batteries.
C
A Risk of explosion.
flames or sparks away
F
from battery. Do not smoke.
D Keep

B

Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.

In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.

Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.

Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

231

Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of
앫
앫

Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
system: approx. 3.2 US qt. (3 l).
Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system: approx. 6.4 US qt. (6 l).

During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

232

Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reservoir.
Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite. You could be seriously
burned.

More information can be found in the
“Technical data” (컄 page 324).

1 Washer fluid reservoir

!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase
Warning!

G

Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫

The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged

앫

The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed

Warning!

G

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.

Retread tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation.

Important guidelines
앫

Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.

앫

Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.

앫

Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.

앫

Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage.

앫

If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.

앫

Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).

앫

When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).

233

Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire

Direction of rotation

The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:

Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better aquaplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
specified.

앫

Driving style

앫

Tire pressure

앫

Distance driven
Warning!

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation.

G

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.

!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.

G

If the tire pressure repeatedly drops
앫

check the tires for punctures from foreign objects

앫

check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim

Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.

234

A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.

i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.

Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!

If the tires are warm you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.

Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Warning!

G

Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.

Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Warning!

Rotating wheels
Warning!

sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.

G

Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.

G

Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.

On vehicles with the same wheel size all
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or

235

Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
앫
앫

Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄 page 324).

앫

앫

Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started, even at
low ambient temperatures.
Tire change. We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for
the winter season.

Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter
operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.

236

Warning!

G

Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Operation
Winter driving

Warning!

G

If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.

Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.

i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 75) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction.

Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫

Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.

앫

Chains should only be used on the rear
wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.

앫

Use only snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.

!
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes 225/50 R16 and with
tire sizes 225/45 R17.

The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

237

Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).

The type of service due is indicated in the
multifunction display field:
9

Minor service (A)

´

Major service (B)

Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

SERVICE A - IN xx DAYS
SERVICE A - IN xx MILES (KM)
SERVICE A - DUE NOW

238

The service indicator is automatically
cleared
앫

after 10 seconds when you switch on
the ignition or when reaching the service threshold while driving.

앫

after 30 seconds, once the suggested
service term had passed.

You can also clear it yourself by pressing
the reset knob on the instrument cluster
(컄 page 22).

FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):

Clearing the service indicator

Service term exceeded

i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.

If you have exceeded the suggested service term a signal sounds every time when
you switch on the ignition and you will see
the following message in the multifunction
display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx MILES (KM)

Operation
Maintenance
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Calling up the service indicator
왘

Switch ignition on.

Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘

The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 105).
왘

Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the multifunction
display.

i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.

Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 105).

왘

Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the display.

왘

Press the reset knob for about four
seconds.

i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing the proper service
as called for by the FSS will cause the
FSS to incorrectly determine the next
service interval which will result in engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

This message appears in the display:
DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL? CONFIRM BY PRESSING RESET (R)
BUTTON
왘

To confirm, hold down the reset knob
for about four seconds.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.

239

Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!

G

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.

While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫

Air pollution

앫

Road salt

앫

Tar, gravel and stone chipping

240

앫

Grease and oil

앫

Fuel

앫

Coolant

앫

Brake fluid

앫

Insects

앫

Tree resins etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫

Near the ocean

앫

In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)

앫

During winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Operation
Vehicle care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!

Paintwork, painted body components

Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.

The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.

Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
and washing detergent used.

Additional information can be found in the
booklet ’Vehicle Care Guide’.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle always observe manufacturer’s
operating instructions.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors etc.).

241

Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

242

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.

Ornamental moldings

Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.

Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
lenses

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.

Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades

Light alloy wheels

Instrument cluster

Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean
cloth and detergent solution.

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.

i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
Window cleaning
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.

i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers
and remove key from starter switch before cleaning the windshield, otherwise
the wiper motor can suddenly turn on
and cause injury.

If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.

Steering wheel and gear selector lever

i

Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.

Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.

Cup holder

Follow instructions on container.

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.

243

Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items

Leather upholstery

Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.

Headliner
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!

G

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.

244

Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lintfree cloth and apply with
light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses

245

Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster

General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when

turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.

Problem

Possible cause

Suggested solution

v

The yellow ESP warning lamp
lights up while driving.

The ESP is deactivated. Risk of accident!
왘 Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 75).
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailIf the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing road conditions.
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

v

The yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.

The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in
at least one tire.

왘

When driving off apply as little throttle
as possible.

왘

While driving ease up on the accelerator.

왘

Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.

왘

Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (컄 page 76).

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accidents.

246

Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem

-

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
ing.
switched off (see messages in display).

왘

Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.

The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accidents.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.

왘

When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.

247

Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem

1

Possible cause
The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sysup while driving.
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.

Warning!

G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

248

Suggested solution
왘

Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem

3
;

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving and you
hear a warning sound.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

왘

Release the parking brake
(컄 page 46).

The red brake warning lamp
lights up while driving.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

왘

Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.

(Canada only)
(USA only)

Warning!

G

Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.

!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.

249

Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem

?

The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.

Possible cause

Suggested solution

There is a malfunction in:

왘

Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.

The fuel cap is not closed tight.

왘

Check the fuel cap.

Your gas tank is empty.

왘

After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.

앫

The fuel management system

앫

The ignition system

앫

The emission control system

앫

Systems which impact emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.

<

The red seat belt warning lamp
blinks for a brief period after
starting the engine.

The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp
lights up while driving.

250

The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.

왘

Fasten your seat belt.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.

왘

Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 224).

Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem

7

Possible cause
The indicator lamp lights up.

A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.

7

Suggested solution

TM

The indicator lamp does not light The system is malfunctioning.
up with a BabySmartTM child
seat properly installed on the
front passenger seat.

왘

Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.

왘

If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.

251

Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the display
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄 page 112) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display with a red background.
Cetrain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset knob (컄 page 22).
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority (regular
display colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset knob
and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory (컄 page 112).

252

Warning!

G

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

Warning!

G

No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

i
Turning the key in starter switch to
position 2 causes all lamps as well as
the multifunction display to come on.
Ensure that they are all in working order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of all the messages that may
appear in the display.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

-

ABS SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are
also deactivated. The brake system is still
functioning normally but without the ABS
available.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!

ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

253

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
BAS

BRAKE ASSIST
NOT AVAILABLE!

BRAKE ASSIST
VISIT WORKSHOP!

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the BAS has switched off.

왘

When the voltage is above this value
again, the BAS is operational again.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!

BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.

254

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

#

BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.

왘

Have the battery checked at a service station.

The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:

왘

Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.

앫

alternator malfunctioning

If it is broken:

앫

broken poly-V-belt

왘

Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

If it is intact:
왘

Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

255

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.

왘

VISIT WORKSHOP!

Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.

BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!

There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.

왘

Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.

3 (Canada only) BRAKE WEAR
; (USA only)

Warning!

G

Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid
before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

256

!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.

!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the service booklet.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

B

Warning!

COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL

G

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The coolant level is too low.

왘

Add coolant (컄 page 229).

왘

If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.

257

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

Ï

Warning!

COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!

G

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.

258

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The coolant is too hot.

왘

Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.

왘

Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.

During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 120°C.

!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

Ï

COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The poly-V-belt could be broken.

왘

Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:
왘

Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

If it is intact:

COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.

왘

Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing
so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

왘

Observe the coolant temperature
gauge.

왘

Have the fan replaced as soon as
possible.

259

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

Possible cause

Suggested solution

J

DOOR OPEN!

You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.

왘

Close the doors.

ESP

ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!

The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply. The
ABS might not be operational.

왘

With vehicle stationary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel
completely to the left and then to the
right to synchronize the ESP.

If the ESP message does not go out:
왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
The self-diagnosis has not been completed.

260

The display will clear itself after driving a
short distance at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h).

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

ESP

ESP
NOT AVAILABLE!

ESP
VISIT WORKSHOP!

Possible cause

Suggested solution

The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ESP has switched off.

왘

When the voltage is above this value
again, the ESP is operational again.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.

261

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

:

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!

Suggested solution

There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.

왘

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.

왘

Turn off the engine.

왘

Add engine oil.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK LEVEL!

The engine oil level is too low.

왘

Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 227) and add oil as required.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL!

You have added too much engine oil. There
is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.

왘

Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.

ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

왘

Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 227) and add oil as required.

왘

If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.

There is water in the oil.

왘

Have the oil checked.

The measuring system is malfunctioning.

왘

Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP!

262

Possible cause

Practical hints
What to do if …
When the “ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK
LEVEL!” message appears while the engine
is running and at operating temperature,
the engine oil level is low.

If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest gas station where the engine oil should be filled up with an approved oil (컄 page 227).

!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Display

Possible cause

Suggested solution

A

RESERVE FUEL
VISIT FILLING STATION!

The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.

왘

Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 224).

Y
I

HOOD OPEN!

You are driving with the hood open.

왘

Close the hood (컄 page 226).

REPLACE KEY
VISIT WORKSHOP!

No additional code available for SmartKey.

왘

Change the batteries (컄 page 294).

AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!

You have forgotten to remove the key.

왘

Remove the key from the starter
switch.

LAMP SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.

왘

Set lamp operation to manual.

왘

Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.

.

263

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

.

264

Possible cause

Suggested solution

LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LAMP!

The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LAMP!

The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

DISPLAY DEFECTIVE
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The display for the lamps or the system is
malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

TURN SIGNAL, LR
CHECK LAMP!

The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

TURN SIGNAL, RR
CHECK LAMP!

The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

TURN SIG. IN MIRROR, L
CHECK LAMP!

The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear
if all light emitting diodes have stopped
working.

왘

Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.

TURN SIG. IN MIRROR, R
CHECK LAMP!

The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.

왘

Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

.

Possible cause

Suggested solution

TURN SIGNAL, LF
CHECK LAMP!

The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

TURN SIGNAL RF
CHECK LAMP!

The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

BRAKE LAMP
VISIT WORKSHOP!

Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp
is permanently on.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

BRAKE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!

The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

BRAKE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!

The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

3RD BRAKE LAMP
CHECK LAMP!

The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LAMP!

The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LAMP!

The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

265

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

.

266

Possible cause

Suggested solution

LICENSE PLATE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!

The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

LICENSE PLATE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!

The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

FRONT FOGLAMP, L
CHECK LAMP!

The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

FRONT FOGLAMP, R
CHECK LAMP!

The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

REAR FOGLAMP
CHECK LAMP!

The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

REVERSE LAMP L
CHECK LAMP!

The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

REVERSE LAMP R
CHECK LAMP!

The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

TAIL LAMP, L
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

.

Possible cause

Suggested solution

TAIL LAMP, R
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

SIDE MARKER LAMP, LF
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

The left side marker lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

SIDE MARKER LAMP, RF
CHECK LAMP!
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

The right side marker lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

LIGHTS
TURN OFF LAMPS!

This display appears if the driver’s door is
opened with the engine shut off and no
key in the starter switch.

왘

Insert key in the starter switch.

왘

Switch off lights.

AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!

Key in the starter switch position 1 or 2.

왘

Remove key from the starter switch.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

왘

Release the parking brake
(컄 page 46).

The seat belt system is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

!(Canada only) PARKING BRAKE
; (USA only)

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE!

<

SEAT BELT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!

267

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

<

_

Possible cause

Suggested solution

FRT. PASSENGER SEAT
LOOK!

The display reminds you and your passenger to fasten the seat belt.

왘

Fasten the seat belts.

DRIVER’S SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT!

The display reminds you to fasten the seat
belt.

왘

Fasten the seat belts.

STEERING WHEEL ADJUST
LOCK!

The steering column is not properly locked.

왘

Lock the steering column properly
(컄 page 38).

POWER STEERING FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The power steering gear oil level is too low.
There is a danger of steering gear damage.

왘

Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G

Do not add steering oil without checking the
steering system.

If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
too low, the steering power assistance could
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
to turn the steering wheel.

Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Warning!

268

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

Possible cause

Suggested solution
왘

Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

L

TELE AID
VISIT WORKSHOP!

One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.

ì

FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE

This display appears if button ì or
í on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.

Ê

TRUNK OPEN!

This message will appear whenever the
trunk lid is open.

왘

Close the trunk lid.

1

RESTRAINT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!

The system is malfunctioning.

왘

Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning!

G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the

SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.

269

Practical hints
What to do if …
Display

#

G

±

W

270

Possible cause

Suggested solution

UNDERVOLTAGE
ENGINE ON!

The battery has insufficient voltage and
can no longer supply the convenience
functions such as seat heater*.

Start the engine (컄 page 44).

UNDERVOLTAGE
SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF!

The battery is malfunctioning.

왘

Have the battery checked at a service station.

VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY DEFECTIVE

Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:

왘

Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center (컄 page 250).

왘

Add washer fluid (컄 page 232).

WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!

앫

Coolant temperature gauge

앫

Tachometer

앫

Cruise control display

The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit

Spare wheel

The first aid kit is stored in the trunk behind the left trim panel.

The spare wheel is located under the trunk
floor.
왘

왘

Turn handles 2.

왘

Remove the trim panel 1.

왘

Loosen the securing strap 2.

왘

Remove first aid kit 1.

Lift trunk floor and engage handle in
the upper edge of the trunk.

i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.

1 Spare wheel
2 Storage tray with vehicle tool kit.
3 Mounting screw for spare wheel/cover
for vehicle tools
Removing the spare wheel
왘

Turn the mounting screw 3 counterclockwise.

왘

Remove the spare wheel 1.

271

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Storing the spare wheel
왘

Place spare wheel 1 in wheel well.

왘

Turn mounting screw 3 clockwise to its
stop to secure the spare wheel.

왘

Lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk lid.

5 Towing eye bolt
6 Spare wheel bolts
Vehicle jack

Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and air pump are stored
in the wheel well below the trunk floor.

1 Vehicle jack
2 Air pump
3 Alignment bolt
4 Wheel wrench

272

왘

왘

Remove the vehicle jack from the spare
wheel well under the trunk floor.

왘

Push the crank handle up.

Turn the crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).

Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment:
앫

It should be fully collapsed.

앫

The handle must be folded in (storage
position).

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?

Warning!

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jack stands before working under
the vehicle.

Spare wheel bolts

Warning!

G

Be sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired.

Refer to “Technical data” section
(컄 page 313) for model and spare wheel
rim size information.
1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel
rim size 4 1/2B x15 H2

!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x15 H2 (컄 page 313).
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x15 H2 can cause physical
damage to the vehicle.

273

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle

i

Unlocking the driver’s door

Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:

If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the SmartKey, open the door
using the mechanical key.

3 Unlocking
4 Locking
왘

1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘

Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key out of
the housing.

274

Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.

앫

Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.

앫

Insert the key in the starter switch.

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk lid

왘

Fold backrest 3 forward.

If you are unable to unlock the trunk lid
with the SmartKey, you can use the emergency release on the inside of the trunk lid
to unlock it.

왘

Remove cover 1 from the trim on the
trunk lid.

왘

Push release lever 2 all the way to the
right.

왘

Open the trunk lid.

Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
왘

Close the passenger door and the trunk
lid.

i

왘

The trunk lid swings open upwards. Always make sure that there is sufficient
overhead clearance.

Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄 page 87).

왘

Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually.

왘

Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.

1 Cover
2 Release lever
3 Rear bench seat backrest

275

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries

i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.

If the batteries in the SmartKey card are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!

G

왘

The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Insert the mechanical key in side opening and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.

왘

Pull the battery compartment out of the
key housing in direction of arrow.

SmartKey

Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.

Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

3 Battery
4 Contact spring
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘

276

Remove mechanical key (컄 page 274).

왘

Remove the batteries.

왘

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.

왘

Return battery compartment into housing until it locks in place.

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Fuel filler flap

Manually unlocking the transmission
selector lever
In the case of power failure the transmission selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

왘

Insert a tool 2 (e.g. screwdriver) into
the opening.

왘

Perform the following two steps simultaneously:

왘

왘

Push the tool down.

왘

Move selector lever from
position P.

Reinstall the coin holder after removing
the tool from the opening.

왘

Open the trunk lid.

i

왘

Fold right-side tail lamp trim aside

왘

Reach inside through opening.

The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.

왘

Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).

왘

Open the storage compartment in front
of the center armrest.

왘

Release coin holder 1 (e.g. using a
small coin).

왘

Swing coin holder 1 aside.

The fuel filler flap can now be opened.

277

Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof drive is
located behind the lens of the interior overhead light.
You can open or close the panorama sliding/pop-up roof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.

왘

Pry off lens 1 using a screwdriver.

왘

Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction of
arrow.

왘

Lower rear of cover and remove.

왘

Remove cover.

왘

Obtain crank 3.

왘

Insert crank 3 through left hand side
motor hole 4.

왘

Turn crank 3 clockwise to:

i

앫

slide roof closed

Do not disconnect electrical connectors.

앫

raise roof at the rear

왘

Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫

slide roof open

앫

lower roof at the rear

The panorama sliding/pop-up roof must be
resynchronized after being operated manually.

278

Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Synchronizing the panorama sliding/pop-up roof
왘

Switch on the ignition.

왘

Move the switch in the “close” direction and wait until the sunshades are
fully closed.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.

왘

왘

Move the switch in the “close” direction and wait until the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is fully closed.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.

The panorama sliding/pop-up roof is synchronized when the panorama sliding/pop-up roof opens automatically.

Move the switch in the “open” direction
and wait until the sunshades are fully
opened.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.

왘

Move the switch in the “open” direction
and wait until the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is approximately 4 in
(10cm) opened.
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.

279

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.

Front lamps
Lamp

Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫

Rear fog lamp

앫

Tail lamps

앫

Standing lamps

Type

1 Additional turn signal lamps

LED

2 Turn signal lamp
Halogen headlamp

1156A

Turn signal lamp
2357A
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
3 Low beam Halogen
Low and hi beam*

i

280

Bulbs

4 High beam
Parking and standing lamp

H7 (55W)
Bi-Xenon*
H7 (55 W)
W5W

5 Fog lamp

HB4/9006
(55 W)

6 Side marker lamp

W5W

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp

Notes on bulb replacement
Type

7 High mounted brake LED
lamp
8 License plate lamps C5W
9 Brake lamp
Turn signal lamp

P 21 W (21W)
PY21W (21W)

Tail, parking stand- W5W (5W)
ing and side marker
lamp
Rear fog lamp, driv- P21W (21W)
er’s side

Warning!

G

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
앫

touch or move it when hot

앫

drop the bulb

앫

scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.

앫

Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.

앫

Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.

앫

Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.

앫

Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.

앫

If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

앫

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫

Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors

앫

High mounted brake lamp

앫

Xenon lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

281

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps

왘

Insert new bulb so that the base fits in
the bulb holder recess and is level.

Halogen headlamps

왘

Place the bulb holder with bulb on the
headlamp mounting and turn the bulb
holder to the right until it engages.

왘

Replace headlamp cover 2 or 3 and
turn to the right until it engages.

Front turn signal lamp bulb
4 Low beam bulb
5 High beam bulb
6 Parking and standing lamp
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp and for parking and standing
lamp
3 Headlamp cover for low beam headlamp

282

Low and high beam bulb

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Turn bulb socket 1 to the left and pull
out.

왘

Push bulb into socket, turn to the left
and remove.

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Turn headlamp cover 2 or 3 to the left
and remove.

왘

Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn to the right.

왘

Turn bulb holder with bulb to the left
and pull out.

왘

Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and turn
to the right.

왘

Pull out the bulb from the base (do not
pull on glass tube).

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb

3 Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon headlamp

Bi-Xenon* headlamps

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

Warning!

왘

Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.

왘

Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb.

왘

Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.

왘

Insert a new bulb in the socket.

Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.

왘

Reinstall the bulb socket.

왘

Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.

G

4 High beam bulb
5 Bulb holder
6 Parking and standing lamp

i
High beam bulb

If the inside of the headlamps is fogged
up, switch the lights on for a sufficient
amount of time.

1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Headlamp cover for high beam headlamp

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.

컄컄

283

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘

Turn bulb holder 5 with bulb to the left
and pull out.

왘

Pull out bulb from the base (do not pull
on glass tube).

왘

Insert new bulb so that the base fits in
the bulb holder recess and is level.

왘

Place the bulb holder with bulb on the
headlamp mounting and turn bulb holder to the right until it engages.

왘

Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.

284

Front turn signal lamp bulb

Parking and standing lamp bulb

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Turn bulb socket 1 to the left and pull
out.

왘

Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and
remove.

왘

Push bulb into socket, turn to the left
and remove.

왘

Pull out the bulb socket 6 with the
bulb.

왘

Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn to the right.

왘

Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.

왘

Insert a new bulb in the socket.

왘

Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and turn
to the right.

왘

Reinstall the bulb socket.

왘

Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to
the right until it engages.

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Carefully slide lamp towards rear.

왘

Remove front end first.

왘

Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.

왘

Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.

왘

Insert new bulb in socket.

왘

Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.

왘

To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.

왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Open the trunk lid (컄 page 85).

왘

Turn handles 2.

왘

Remove the trim panel 1.

왘

Press together the latches 1.

왘

Remove bulb holder.

왘

Gently push bulb into socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.

왘

Insert new bulb and reinstall bulb socket.

왘

Reinstall trim panel.

285

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp

1 Stop lamp
2 Back up lamp
3 Turn signal lamp
4 Tail, parking, standing and rear fog
lamp (driver’s side)

286

1 Screws
왘

Switch off the lights.

왘

Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.

왘

Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.

왘

Retighten the screws.

Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
Warning!

G

Replacing wiper blade insert

왘

For safety reasons, remove key from starter
switch before replacing a wiper blade, otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.

Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.

Fold the wiper arm forward.

왘

Press safety tab down 2.

왘

Push wiper blade downward 1 and remove.

Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.

!

Removing
왘

Installing

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.

왘

Place wiper blade on firm support.

왘

Press down both tabs.

왘

Slide (direction of arrow) the wiper
blade insert out of the retainer claws.

Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.

왘

Slide (direction of arrow) the new wiper
blade insert into retainer claws until
tabs are engaged.

For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

287

Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘

Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.

왘

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

왘

Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.

왘

Move the selector lever to P (manual
transmission to 1st or reverse gear).

왘

Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.

Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!

Preparing the vehicle

G

The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.

288

Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘

Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄 page 271).

Lifting the vehicle
왘

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.

When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘

Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

컄컄

Practical hints
Flat tire
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘

Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.

왘

Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
the jack out of the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 272). Assemble wheel wrench.

Warning!

always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is

1 Jack
2 Crank
3 Take-up bracket

왘

On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).

The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.

왘

Place jack on firm ground.

왘

Position jack 1 under the take-up
bracket 3 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.

왘

Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.

289

Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel

왘

Take the spare tire out of the trunk.

Mounting the new wheel

1 Alignment bolt
왘

Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.

왘

Replace this wheel bolt with the alignment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.

왘

Remove the remaining bolts.

!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘

Remove the wheel.

290

1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims
2 Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel
rim size 4 1/2B x15 H2

Warning!

Be sure to use original lenght wheel bolts
when remounting the original wheel after it
has been repaired.
왘

Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.

왘

Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

왘

Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.

왘

Inflate the spare tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 292).

!
Wheel bolts 2 must be used when
mounting spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x 15 H2 (컄 page 313).
The use of any wheel bolts other than
wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim
size 4 1/2B x15 H2 can cause physical
damage to the vehicle.

G

Warning!

G

Inflate spare wheel with collapsible tire only
after the wheel is properly mounted.
Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.

컄컄

Practical hints
Flat tire
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

Warning!

G

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Warning!

Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.

Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct mounting
bolts.

Lowering the vehicle
왘

Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.

왘

Remove the jack.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.

G

왘

Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.

1-5
왘

Wheel bolts

Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft lb
(110 Nm).

컄컄

291

Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning!

G

Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 ft lb (110 Nm).

Inflating the spare tire
왘

Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk.

Warning!

G

Observe instructions on air pump label.
왘

Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.

1 Flap
2 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
3 Union nut
4 Electrical plug
Please exercise appropriate caution

292

왘

Open flap 1 on air pump.

왘

Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose
with the pressure gauge 2.
Observe instructions on air pump label.

왘

Remove the valve cap from valve.

왘

Screw the air hose 2 on to the tire
valve.

왘

Insert electrical plug 4 into vehicle cigarette lighter socket.

왘

To switch on the air pump turn the key
in the starter switch to position 1
(컄 page 31).

왘

Operate air pump until the pressure
gauge displays 36 psi (2.5 bar)
This takes about five minutes for the
space tire. The air hose 2 and the union
nut 3 can become hot during inflation.

컄컄

Practical hints
Flat tire
!
Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than six minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off.
왘

왘

To switch off the air pump turn the key
in the starter switch to position 0
(컄 page 31).
If the tire pressure is above 36 psi (2.5
bar), release excess tire pressure using
the vent screw.

Warning!

G

Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.

왘

Detach the electric air pump.

왘

Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the air
pump back in the trunk.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinfalted tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the driver’s door latch
post). Overloading the tires can overheat
them, possibly causing a blowout.

293

Practical hints
Battery
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side.

Warning!

G

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.

Removal of filter box:
왘

Release the three clamps 1.

왘

Remove filter box.

Installation of filter box:
왘

Insert filter box properly.

왘

Secure it with the three clamps 1.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.

!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely
damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.

Warning!

G

Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.

294

Practical hints
Battery

Warning!

G

With a disconnected battery
앫

you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the starter switch

앫

the selector lever will remain locked in
position P

Disconnecting the battery
왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 226).

왘

Remove the filter box.

왘

Disconnect the battery negative lead.

왘

Remove the cover from the positive terminal.

왘

Disconnect the battery positive lead.

Removing the batteries

Reconnecting the batteries

왘

Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.

왘

Remove the battery bracket.

왘

Take out the battery.

왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.

왘

Connect the negative lead.

!

Charging and reinstalling batteries
왘

왘

Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.

Warning!

NEVER invert the terminal connections!
왘

Reinstall the filter box.

!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.

G

Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

295

Practical hints
Battery

i
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):
앫

Set the clock (컄 page 116) (vehicles with COMAND*: see COMAND
operator’s manual).

앫

Resynchronize the ESP
(컄 page 260).

앫

Resynchronize side windows
(컄 page 184).

앫

Resynchronize panorama sliding/pop-up roof (컄 page 188).

296

Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!

G

Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫

Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.

앫

Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

앫

Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.

앫

Read all instructions before proceeding.

앫

Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Always make sure that the jumper cabels are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.

!
Jump starting may only be performed
on the battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.

297

Practical hints
Jump starting

Warning!

G

Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 231).

The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side. The
terminals for jump starting are located in
front of the battery.
왘

Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.

왘

Turn off the engine.

On both vehicles:
왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

Apply parking brake.

왘

Shift selector lever to position P (manual transmission to Neutral).

298

1 Positive terminal of charged battery
2 Positive under hood terminal in front of
discharged battery
3 Negative terminal of charged battery
4 Negative under hood terminal in front
of discharged battery
왘

Connect positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery with under hood
terminal 2 in front of the discharged
battery with the jumper cables. Clamp
cable to charged battery 1 first.

왘

Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.

왘

Connect negative terminal 3 of the
charged battery with under hood
terminal 4 in front of the discharged
battery with the jumper cables. Clamp
cable to charged battery 3 first.

왘

Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

After the engine has started, you can again
turn on the electrical consumers. Do not
turn on the lights under any circumstances.
왘

Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 2.

왘

Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

!
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.

!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with key in starter switch turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 79) and deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 122).

When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.

!
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.

!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel
brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N (manual transmission:
gears disengaged) and the key must be
in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).

299

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.

Warning!

G

If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫

the engine will not run

앫

there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system

as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
starter switch position 2.
If the key is left in starter switch position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from starter switch and reinsert.

300

i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
key in starter switch to position 2 and
activate the combination switch for the
left or right turn signal in the usual
manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the braking and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

!

i

When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:

If the battery is disconnected or discharged

With the automatic central locking activated and the key in starter switch
position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the
left front wheel as well as the right rear
wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of
approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 79).

앫

the key will not turn in the starter
switch. See notes on the battery
(컄 page 294) or on jump starting
(컄 page 297).

앫

the selector lever will remain
locked in position P. See notes on
manual unlocking of gear selector
lever (컄 page 277).

To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄 page 122).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.

301

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt

To remove cover:
왘

Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.

왘

Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.

The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the wheel well below the
trunk floor).
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper.

왘

To reinstall cover:
왘

302

Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
Fit cover and snap into place.

Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses

i

Opening

Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.

왘

Pry cover 1 open with a screw driver or
similar tool.

왘

Remove cover rearward.

Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Closing

Fuse box in passenger compartment

왘

Attach the cover in the front.

왘

Fold the cover in until it engages.

Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand side.

Fuse chart
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment. The amperages of the fuses are also given there.

1 Cover
2 Screw
3 Retainer
Removing/installing cover
왘

Twist screws 2 90° counterclockwise.

왘

Pull up cover 1.

왘

Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover
by pulling towards front.

왘

Install cover 1 in reverse order.

303

Practical hints
Fuses
Opening fuse box

Auxiliary fuse box in trunk
The auxiliary fuse box is located in the
trunk behind the left hand trim panel.

3 Auxiliary fuse box
4 Fuse box cover
5 Clamps
왘

Release clamps 5.

왘

Remove cover 4.

Closing fuse box
왘

Ensure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned.

왘

Press the cover down and secure with
clamps 5.

304

Fuse extractor
1 Trim panel
2 Handles
Opening trim panel
왘

Turn handles 2.

왘

Remove trim panel 1.

The fuse extractor is found in the cover of
the auxiliary fuse box.

Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information

305

Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.

306

!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

앫

Emission System Warranty

앫

Emission Performance Warranty

앫

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

307

Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
Certification label

1 Certification label

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Identification labels and numbers

3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
6 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.

308

Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
C 230 Kompressor

1 Power steering pump
2 Idler pulley
3 Mechanical loader
4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)

C 320

1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)

309

Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model

C 230 Kompressor (203.740)1

C 320 (203.764)1

Engine

271

112

Mode of operation

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

No. of cylinders

4

6

Bore

3.23 in (82.00 mm)

3.54 in (89.90 mm)

Stroke

3.35 in (85.00 mm)

3.3 in (84.00 mm)

Total piston displacement

109.6 cu.in. (1796 cm )

195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)

Compression ratio

8.5:1

10:1

Output acc. to SAE J 1349

189 hp/5800 rpm
(141 kW/5800 rpm)

214 hp/5700 rpm

192 ft.lb/3500 rpm
(260 Nm/3500 rpm)

232 ft.lb/3000 rpm

Maximum engine speed

6000 rpm

6000 rpm

Firing order

1-3-4-2

1-4-3-6-2-5

Poly-V-belt

7 ft 11 in (2420 mm)

7 ft 10 in (2390 mm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349

1

3

(160 kW/5700 rpm)
(310 Nm/3000 rpm)

The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.

310

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Rims and Tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫

poor handling characteristics

앫

increased noise

앫

increased fuel consumption

!

i

Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle can be the result.

Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized MercedesBenz Center. A tire inflation pressure
table is located on the fuel filler cap of
the vehicle. The tire pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

Same size tires
C 230 Kompressor

C 230 Kompressor*

C 230 Kompressor

C 320

C 320*

C 320
Evolution Package*

Rims (light alloy)

7J x16 H2

7 1/2J x17

7 1/2J x17

Wheel offset

1.46 in (37 mm)

1.46 in (37 mm)

Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
All season tires (radial-ply tires)

205/55 R16 91 H

Winter tires (radial-ply tires)

205/55 R16 91 H M+S

1

225/45 R17 91

1.46 in (37 mm)
W1

225/45 R17 91 H M+S1

225/45 R17 91 W1
225/45 R17 91 H M+S1

Must not be used with snow chains

311

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
C 230 Kompressor*
C 320*
Front axle
Rims (light alloy)

7J x16 H2

Wheel offset

1.46 in (37 mm)

Summer tires (radial-ply tires)

205/55 R16 91 V

Winter tires (radial-ply tires)

205/55 R16 91 H M+S

Rear axle
Rims (light alloy)

8J x16 H2

Wheel offset

1.26 in (32 mm)

Summer tires (radial-ply tires)

225/50 R16 92 V1

Winter tires (radial-ply tires)

205/55 R16 91 H M+S

1

Must not be used with snow chains

312

Technical data
Rims and Tires
Spare wheel
C 230 Kompressor
1/ B
2

Rim (light alloy)

4

Wheel offset

0.47 in (12 mm)

Collapsible Tire
1

x15 H2

165 - 15

89P1

C 320
4 1/2B x16 H2
0.47 in (12 mm)
165/70 - 16 92P1

Must not be used with snow chains.

313

Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model

C 230 Kompressor

C 320

Generator (alternator)

14 V/120 A

14 V/120 A

Starter motor

12 V/1.1 kW

12 V/1.7 kW

Battery

12V/100 Ah

12V/100 Ah

Spark plugs

Bosch F 6 MPP 332

Bosch F 8 DPP332
NGK PFR 5 R-11

Electrode gap

0.031 in (0.8 mm)

0.039 in (1.0 mm)

Tightening torque

18 – 22 ft.lb (25 - 30 Nm)

15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)

314

Technical data
Main Dimensions
Main Dimensions
Model

C 230 Kompressor
C 320

Overall vehicle length

171.0 in (4345 mm)

Overall vehicle width

68.0 in (1728 mm)

Overall vehicle height

55.4 in (1406 mm)

Wheelbase

106.9 in (2715 mm)

Track, front

58.8 in (1493 mm)

Track, rear

57.6 in (1464 mm)

315

Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

316

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities

Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and recommended by us.
Model

Engine with oil filter

Capacity

C 230 Kompressor 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
C 320

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Recommended engine oils

7.9 US qt (7.5 l)

Automatic transmission

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

MB Automatic Transmission Oil1

Manual transmission

1.3 US qt (1.2 l)

MB Manual Transmission Oil2

Rear axle

1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

Power steering

approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)

MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

Front wheel hubs

approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each

High temperature roller bearing grease

Brake system

0.5 US qt (0.5 l)

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling system

C 230 Kompressor approx. 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
C 320

1
2

MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent

approx. 10.5 US qt (10.0 l)

MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
MB part no. 001 989 26 03 10

317

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Fuel tank
including a reserve of

Capacity

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

16.4 US gal (62.0 l)
2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)

Air conditioning system

R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)

Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system:
Without headlamp cleaning system
With headlamp cleaning
system

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1

1

3.2 US qt (3 l)
6.4 US qt (6 l)

Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 324).

318

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils

Engine oil additives

Brake fluid

Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may be harmful to the engine operation.

Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Air conditioning refrigerant

During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the
system will occur.

Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.

319

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline

!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫

Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.

앫

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.

앫

Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.

앫

Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.

320

Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded meeting
ASTM standard D 439:
앫

The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc.

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫

Warm-up hesitation

앫

Unstable idle

앫

Knocking/pinging

앫

Misfire

앫

Power loss

Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫

Corrosion protection

앫

Freeze protection

앫

Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil over protection. You should have it replaced every
15 years or 150 000 miles (250 000 km),
whichever comes first.

321

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
above replacement interval is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If
you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

322

If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure that the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model

Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)

– 49°F (– 45°C)

C 230 Kompressor

4.2 US qt (4.0 l)

4.7 US qt (4.4 l)

C 320

4.8 US qt (4.5 l)

5.3 US qt (5.0 l)

323

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx.
앫

6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system*

앫

3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
headlamp cleaning system

왘

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫

Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may burn.
You can be seriously burned.

1 part “S” to 100 parts water

[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water]
For temperatures below freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫

1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent

[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].

324

Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear

Traction

Temperature

200

AA

A

All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.

Tread wear

Traction

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!

G

The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

325

Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

326

Warning!

G

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

Technical terms

ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the center console lights
up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger side airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.

CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.

327

Technical terms

Collapsible tire
An especially compact spare tire that
must be inflated with a provided air
pump before using. It should only be
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest
service station.
COMAND*
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as for other optional equipment (CD changer,
telephone, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.

328

Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.

ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.

Technical terms

GPS*
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer
and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.

Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each key.

Multifunction display
Display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.

Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for example, you will find the commands Select
radio station or Operate CD player.
Using commands you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.

MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

329

Technical terms

Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including
앫

engine

앫

clutch/torque converter

앫

transmission

앫

transfer case

앫

drive shaft

앫

differential

앫

axle shafts/axles

330

Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and
winter operation W.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As independant systems, their protective functions complement one another.

RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P
without key turned and brake pedal depressed.

Technical terms

SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid* System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.

Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.

VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).

331

332

Index

A
ABS 23, 73, 327
ABS control 74
Malfunction indicator lamp 247
Messages in display 253
Warning lamp 247
Accelerator position, automatic transmission 137
Accident
In case of 50
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 148, 157
Air recirculation mode 146, 154
Anti-theft alarm system 78
Automatic climate control 151
Central locking (control system) 122
Climate control 143
Defrost 146, 154
Easy-entry/exit feature 123
ESP 77
Exterior headlamps 47
Exterior lamps 97
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 47
High beams 99
Ignition 31

Immobilizer 53, 78
Rear fog lamp 97
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Residual heat 158
Seat heater* 92
Tow-away alarm 79
Windshield wipers 48
Adding
Coolant 230
Engine oil 228
Additional turn signals 280
Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger compartment 149, 158
Adjusting 32
Air distribution 145, 153
Air volume 145, 153
Backrest tilt 33, 35
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Head restraint height 33, 35, 37
Head restraint tilt 34, 35
Head restraints 37
Inside rear view mirror 39
Instrument cluster illumination 102
Manual seat 33
Mirrors 39
Rear seat head restraints 36

Seat cushion tilt 33, 35
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33, 34
Seat height 33, 35
Seats 32
Steering column height 39
Steering column length 39
Steering wheel 37
Air conditioner (cooling)
Turning off 148, 157
Turning on 148, 157
Air conditioner refrigerant 319
Air distribution
Adjusting 145, 153
Air outlets, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 149, 158
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 234
Air recirculation mode 146, 154
Activating 146, 154
Deactivating 147, 155
Air volume
Adjusting 145, 153
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 251
Airbags 57
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 327
BabySmartTM deactivation system 67

333

Index

Children 58
Front 61
Passenger 61
Safety guidelines 60
Side impact 61
Window curtain 61
Alarm
Audible 72, 79
Canceling 79
Visual 78
Alarm system
Anti-theft 78
Alignment bolt 290
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 327
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 322
Antiglare
Automatic 138
Antilock brake system (ABS) 327
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 78
Canceling alarm 79
Disarming 79
Anti-theft systems 78
Anti-theft alarm system 78
Immobilizer 78
Tow-away alarm 79

334

Aquaplaning 219
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 196
Storage spaces 197
Ashtray 198
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 229
AUDIO menu 110
Selecting radio station 111
Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation 159
Button and soft key operation 162
Cassette mode 168
CD mode 172
Operating and display elements 160
Operating safety 159
Operation 162
Radio mode 165
Switching off 162
Switching on 162
Telephone operation 176
Audio systems 159
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
138
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control system) 122

Automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution 153
Air recirculation mode 154
Deactivating 148
Defrosting 154
Rear window defroster 156
Residual heat utilization 158
Residual ventilation 158
Setting the temperature 152
Automatic climate control* 150
Automatic headlamp mode 97
Automatic lighting control
Activating 100
Deactivating 100
Automatic locking when driving 87
Automatic transmission 132
Accelerator position 137
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 137
Fluid level 229
Gear ranges 134
Gear selector lever position 135
Gear shifting malfunctions 137
Kickdown 137
Manual shifting 133
One-touch gearshifting 133

Index

Program mode selector switch 136
Selector lever position 132
Starting with 45
Transmission fluid 229
Winter program mode 136
Auxiliary fuse box 304
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 67
Compatible child seats 67, 327
Self-test 68
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system
327
Backrest
Folding forward 193
Folding rearward 193
BAS 74, 327
Messages in display 254
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 276
Check lamp 83
Checking 84
Battery discharged
Jump starting 297

Battery, vehicle 231, 294
Charging 295
Disconnecting 295
Messages in display 270
Reconnecting 295
Reinstalling 295
Removing 295
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 327
Bi-Xenon type
Front lamp bulbs 283
Block heater 237
Bolts
For spare wheel 273
Brake assist system (BAS) 327
Brake fluid 225, 319
Brake lamp bulbs 281
Brake lamp, high mounted 281
Brake pads
Message in display 256
Brakes 216
Warning lamp 249
Break-in period 214
Bulbs, replacing 280
Additional turn signals 280
Brake lamps 281
Fog lamps 280

Front lamps 280
High beam 280
High mounted brake lamp 281
License plate lamps 281, 286
Low beam 280
Parking lamps 280, 281, 283, 284
Rear fog lamp 281
Rear fog lamps 285
Side marker lamps 280, 285
Standing lamps 280, 281, 283, 284
Tail lamp assemblies 281, 285
Turn signal lamps 280, 281
Button
Audio system 162
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 327
Calling up
Range (distance to empty) 126
Service indicator 239
CAN system 327
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 317
Cargo compartment
Lighting 101
Casette mode
Playing cassettes 168

335

Index

Cassette player
Operating 112
Catalytic converter 222
CD changer* 172
CD mode 172
CD player
Operating 111
Center console 25
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 251
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 117
Central locking
From inside 87
Switch 87
Switching on/off (control system) 122
Unlocking from inside 87
Central locking switch 87
Certification label 308
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey) 276
Key setting 123
Changing CDs 172
Charcoal filter 156
Charging
Vehicle battery 295

336

CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 250
Checking
Coolant level 225, 229
Oil level 225, 227
Tire inflate pressure 225
Vehicle lighting 225
Child safety 65
Airbags 58
Infant and child restraint systems 62,
65
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Child seat mounts see LATCH child seat
mounts 70
Cigarette lighter 199
Cleaning
Cup holder 243
Gear selector lever 243
Hard plastic trim items 244
Headlamps 140
Headliner 244
Instrument cluster 243
Leather upholstery 244
Light alloy wheels 243
MB Tex upholstery 244
Plastic and rubber parts 244

Seat belts 244
Steering wheel 243
Windows 243
Windshield 49
Wiper blades 243
Climate control 142
Adjusting 145
Defogging windshield 145
Defrosting 146
Rear window defroster 147
Setting the temperature 145
Clock 23, 116
Closing
Glove box 195
Hood 227
Side windows 182
Sliding/pop-up roof 186, 278
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
187
Sunshades for the
sliding/pop-up roof 185
Trunk lid 86
Windows 182
Windows with SmartKey 183
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
In an emergency 278

Index

Cockpit 20, 327
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND*) 328
Collapsible tire 328
COMAND* 328
COMAND* see separate operating
instructions
Combination switch 99
High beam flasher 48, 99
Turn signals 47
Windshield wipers 48
Consumer information 325
Control and operation of
radio transmitters 222
Control system 105, 328
AUDIO menu 110
Convenience submenu 123
Display digital speedometer 110
Functions 106, 109
Instrument cluster submenu 116
Lighting submenu 119
Malfunction memory menu 112
Menus 108, 109, 329
Multifunction display 105
Multifunction steering wheel 106
NAV menu 112

Selecting radio system 111
Settings menu 114
Standard display menu 110
Submenus 107, 109
TEL* menu 126
Trip computer menu 125
Vehicle submenu 122
Convenience submenu 123
Activating easy-entry/exit feature 123
Setting key dependency 124
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 124
Coolant 229, 321
Adding 230
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity 322
Capacities 317
Checking level 229
Messages in display 257, 258
Temperature 223
Temperature gauge 102
Warning lamp 258
Coolant level
Checking 225, 229
Cruise control 189, 328
Canceling 190
Driving downhill 190

Driving uphill 190
Fine adjustment 191
Saving current speed 190
Setting speeds 191
Cruise control lever 189
Cup holder
Cleaning 243
In front seat armrest 196
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 327
D
Daytime running lamp mode 98
Setting 119
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 148
Air recirculation mode 147, 155
Alarm 79
Anti-theft alarm system 79
Automatic climate control 151
Central locking (control system) 122
Climate control 143
Cruise control 190
Defrost 146, 154
Engine with the key 53
ESP 76
Exterior lamps 97
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 120

337

Index

Front fog lamps 120
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 52
Immobilizer 78
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Residual heat 158
Seat heater 92
Tow-away alarm 80
Deep water see Standing water 221
Defogging
Windshield 145, 153
Defrosting 146, 154
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 120
Interior lighting 121
Dialing
A number (telephone) 128
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 50
With starting 45
Digital speedometer 110
Direction of rotation (tires) 234
Discharged battery
Jump starting 297

338

Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 295
Display
Selecting 118
Display elements
Audio system 160
Displays
Digital speedometer 110
Messages 229, 252
Selecting 118
Service indicator 238
Showing malfunctions 113
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 125
Door control panel 27
Door handle 27
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 208
Doors
Message in display 260
Opening from inside vehicle 85
Opening from outside 83
Downhill driving
Cruise control 190
Downshifting 131, 133
Drink holder see Cup holder 196

Drinking and driving 215
Driving
Aquaplaning 219
General instructions 41, 215
In winter 220
Problems 50
Safety systems 73
Through standing water 221
Driving abroad 221
Driving instructions 215
Driving off 217
Driving safety systems
ABS 73
BAS 74
ESP 75
Driving systems 189
Cruise control 189
Driving safety systems 73
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 89
Activating 123
Interrupting movement 123
Electrical fuses 303
Electrical system
Technical data 314

Index

Electronic Stability Program
see ESP 23, 75, 328
Emergency call
Telephone 179
Emergency call system* 201
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 204
With Tele Aid* 202
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) 137
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 278
Locking the vehicle 275
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 278
Remote door unlock 208
Unlocking the vehicle 274
Emergency release
Trunk lid 86
Emergency tensioning device
see ETD 64, 328
Emission control 223
Emission control label 308
Ending
A call (telephone) 128
Engine
Compartment 226

Message in display 250
Starting with automatic transmission
45
Starting with manual transmission 44
Starting with the key 45
Technical data 310
Turning off with the key 52
Engine cleaning 242
Engine compartment 226
Fuse box in 303
Hood 226
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 23, 250
Engine number 328
Engine oil 227, 319
Adding 228
Additives 319
Checking level 227
Consumption 227
Display messages 262
Filler neck 228
Messages in display 229, 262
Viscosity 328
Engine oil level see Oil level 225
ESP 23, 75, 328
Messages in display 260
Switching off 76

Switching on 77
Warning lamp 246
ETD 328
Safety guidelines 60
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 64
Exterior lamp switch 96
Exterior lamps
Delayed shut-off 120
Exterior rear view mirror
Activating parking position 140
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 40
Parking position for 124
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 117
Fastening the seat belts 41
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 191
First aid kit 271
Flat tire 288
Inflating the spare tire 292
Lowering the vehicle 291
Mounting the spare wheel 288
Preparing the vehicle 288
Spare wheel 271

339

Index

Flexible Service System (FSS) 238, 328
Fog lamp, rear 98, 281
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 280
Fog lamps, front
Messages in display 266
Replacing bulbs 281
Switching on 98
Front airbags 61
Front lamps
Bi-Xenon type 283
Halogen-type 282
Messages in display 264–267
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Switching on 96
Front seat backrest
Folding backrest back 36
Folding backrest forward 35
Front seat head restraints
Installing 90
Manual seat 90
Power seat* 90
Removing 90
Front seats
Heater 91
FSS (Flexible Service System) 238, 328

340

Fuel 225
Additives 321
Fuel reserve warning lamp 250
Gasoline additives 321
Premium unleaded gasoline 225, 318,
320
Requirements 320
Reserve warning 23
Technical data 317
Fuel additives 321
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 125
Since last reset 125
Fuel filler flap 224
Locking 224
Opening 277
Unlocking 224
Fuel requirements 320
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 263
Fuel tank
Capacity 318
Filler flap 224
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities 317

Functions (control system) 106, 109
Resetting 115
Fuse box 303
Fuse chart 303
Fuse extractor 304
Fuses 303
Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 304
Fuse box in engine compartment 303
Fuse box in passenger compartment
303
Fuse chart 303
Fuse extractor 304
G
Garage door opener 26, 209
Erasing in remote control 212
Integrated remote control 210
Rolling code programming 211
Gasoline see Fuel 225
Gasoline additives 321
Gear range 328
Automatic transmission 134
Limiting 134
Shifting into optimal 133
Gear range limit
Canceling 133

Index

Gear selector lever
Cleaning 243
Position 135
Global
Locking 83
Unlocking 83
Global Positioning System (GPS) 329
Glove box 21, 195
Closing 195
Opening 195
Good visibility 138
GPS 329
GPS see COMAND* 207
H
Halogen-type
Front lamp bulbs 282
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 210
Hands-free microphone 26
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 244
Hazard warning flasher 99
Switching off 99
Switching on 99

Head restraints 90
Manual seats 33
Power seats* 35
Rear seats 36
Headlamp cleaning system 232
Headlamps
Automatic control 97
Bi-Xenon 327
Bi-Xenon type*
Replacing bulbs 283
Cleaning 242
Cleaning system 140, 232
Halogen-type
Replacing bulbs 282
Refilling washer fluid 232
Switching off 52
Switching on 47
Washer fluid 324
Washer system 324
Headliner
Cleaning 244
Heated seats 91
Height adjustment
Head restraints 33, 35, 37
Seat belts 43
Steering wheel 37

High beam flasher 48, 99
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 265
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Switching on 99
High beam headlamps xenon type
Replacing bulbs 283
High mounted brake lamp 281
Hood 226
Closing 227
Message in display 263
Opening 226
Hydroplaning see Aquaplaning 219
I
Identification labels 308
Certification label 308
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
308
Ignition 31
Switching on 45
Immobilizer 78
Activating 78
Deactivating 78
Infant and child restraint systems 65
Installing 69
LATCH child seat mounts 70

341

Index

Inflating
Spare tire 292
Information
Button for Tele Aid* 206
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting 39
Antiglare 138
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 69
Towing eye bolt 302
Wiper blades 287
Instrument cluster 22, 102, 329
Cleaning 243
Coolant temperature gauge 102
Illumination 102
Lamps in 246–250
Multifunction display 105
Outside temperature indicator 104
Selecting language 118
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 20
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 211
Erasing memory 212
Hand-held transmitter 210
Operating 212
Rolling code programming 211

342

Interior lighting 100
Activating automatic control 100
Deactivating automatic control 100
Delayed shut-off 121
Manual operation 100
Interior storage spaces 195
Armrest 197
Cup holder 196
Glove box 195
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
198
Storage compartment in front of armrest 196
J
Jack 272
Jump starting 297
K
Key dependency memory
Settings 124
Key positions in starter switch 31
Key, mechanical 274, 275
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 83
Changing the batteries 276
Checking the batteries 84

Factory setting 83
Global locking 83
Global unlocking 83
Loss of 84
Positions in starter switch 31
Remote controls 82
Restoring to factory setting 83
Selective setting 83
Starting the engine 45
Turning off the engine 53
Unlocking with 30
Keys 82
Kickdown 137, 329
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 117
Km/h or mph in speedometer 117
L
Labels, identification 308
Lamp bulbs, exterior 280
Lamps, exterior
Front 280
Light sensor 263
Messages in display 264–267
Rear 281

Index

Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 247
Airbag Off 61
Battery (SmartKey) 83
Brakes 249
CHECK ENGINE 250
Coolant 257
Engine diagnostics 250
ESP 246
Fuel reserve 250
Instrument cluster 246–250
Seat belts 250
Service indicator 238
SRS 57
Turn signals 23
Language
Multifunction display 118
Setting 118
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Folding back 70
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 309
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 244
License plate lamps
Messages in display 266
Replacing bulbs 281, 286

Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 243
Technical data 311
Light sensor 263
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 199
Lighting 96
Automatic headlamp mode 97
Combination switch 99
Daytime running lamp mode 98
Exterior lamp switch 96
Front fog lamps 98
High beam flasher 99
High beams 99
Instrument cluster illumination 102
Interior 100
Locator lighting 98
Low beam 96
Manual headlamp mode 97
Night security illumination 98
Parking lamps 96
Rear fog lamp 98
Settings (control system) 119
Trunk 101
Limiting the gear range 134
Limp Home Mode 137

Loading 192
Instructions 194
Roof rack 192
Split rear bench seat 192
Locator lighting 98
Setting 120
Lock button 329
Lock buttons 329
Locking 51, 82
Fuel filler flap 224
Global, SmartKey 83
Vehicle in an emergency 275
Loss of keys 84
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 307
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 264
Replacing bulbs 280, 282
Lowering
Vehicle 291
Lubricants
Technical data 317
Luggage cover 192
M
Main dimensions 315
Maintenance 238

343

Index

Malfunction
Displaying 113
Malfunction memory 112
Calling up 112
Manual headlamp mode 97
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 277
Interior lighting control 100
Locking the vehicle 275
Sliding/pop-up roof 278
Unlocking the driver’s door 274
Unlocking the trunk lid 275
Unlocking transmission selector lever
277
Manual seat
Adjusting 33
Adjusting backrest tilt 33
Adjusting head restraint height 33
Adjusting head restraint tilt 34
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33
Adjusting seat height 33
Front seat head restraints 90
Seat fore and aft adjustment 33
Manual transmission 130
Shifting into reverse 131
Starting with 44

344

MAXCOOL maximum cooling 154
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 244
Mechanical key 274, 275
Memory function 93, 329
Recalling positions from memory 94
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 95
Storing key dependent settings 94
Menus 106
AUDIO 110
Control system 329
In control system 108, 109
Malfunction memory 112
NAV 112
Settings menu 114
Standard display 110
Submenus 107
TEL* 126
Trip computer 125
Microphone
Hands-free microphone 26
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 117

Mirrors
Adjusting 39
Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror
138
Exterior rear view mirror 40
Exterior rear view mirror parking positions 124
Inside rear view mirror 39
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 95
MON 225
MON (Motor Octane Number) 329
Mph or km/h in speedometer 117
Multifunction display 105, 329
Selecting language 118
Standard display 109
Multifunction display messages
ABS 253
BAS 254
Battery 270
Brake fluid 256
Brake pads 256
Check engine 250
Coolant 258
Coolant level 257
Display 270

Index

Doors 260
Engine 250
Engine oil level 262
ESP 260
Fuel reserve tank 263
Hood 263
Key 263
Lamps 264–267
Parking brake 267
Power steering fluid 268
Steering wheel adjust 268
Tailgate 269
Tele Aid 269
Telephone* 269
Washer fluid 270
Multifunction steering wheel 24, 106, 329
Buttons 106
N
Navigation system
Operating 112
See separate COMAND* operating instructions
Night security illumination 98
Setting 120

O
Occupant safety 56
Airbags 57
Children and airbags 58
Children in the vehicle 65
Fastening the seat belt 41
Infant and child restraint systems 65
LATCH child seat mounts 70
Seat belts 41, 60
Odometer, main 23
Oil
Adding 228
Checking level 227
Consumption 227
Dipstick 227
Filler neck 228
Viscosity 328
Oil level
Checking 225
One-touch gearshifting 133
Canceling gear range limit 133
Downshifting 133
Upshifting 133
Opening
Ashtray 198
Doors from the inside 85

Fuel filler flap 224
Fuel filler flap manually 277
Glove box 195
Hood 226
Side windows 183
Sliding/pop-up roof 186, 278
Sliding/pop-up roof in an emergency
278
Sliding/pop-up roof with SmartKey
187
Sunshades for the sliding/pop-up roof
185
Trunk lid 85
Windows 182
Windows with SmartKey 183
Operating
Audio system 159
Cassette player 112
CD player 111
COMAND* see separate operating
instructions
Garage door opener 212
Integrated remote control 212
Navigation system 112
Radio 111
Radio transmitters 222

345

Index

Telephone 159
Telephone* 126, 176
Operating safety
Audio system 159
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 242
Outside temperature indicator 104
Overdue service 238
Overhead control panel 26
Overspeed range 329
P
Paintwork 241
Panic alarm 72
Panic button on SmartKey 72
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 198
Parking 51, 217
Parking brake 46, 51
Engaging 51
Message in display 267
Releasing 46
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 283, 284
Switching on 96
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 95, 124

346

Parts see Spare parts service 306
Passenger compartment 221
Fuse box in 303
Inside rear view mirror 39
Interior lighting 100
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
198
Passenger safety see Occupant safety 56
Pedals 215
Phone book*
Loading 128
Quick search 128
Phone number*
Dialing 128
Redialing 129
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 244
Playing
CDs 173
Poly-V-belt drive 330
Layout 309
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 94
Storing into memory 94
Power assistance 216

Power seat*
Adjusting backrest tilt 35
Adjusting head restraint height 35
Adjusting head restraint tilt 35
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35
Adjusting seat height 35
Front seat head restraints 90
Seat fore and aft adjustment 34
Power steering fluid
Message in display 268
Power train 330
Power washer 241
Power windows 182
Side windows 182
Practical hints
First aid kit 271
Fuses 303
Lamp in center console 251
Lamps in instrument cluster 246
Messages in the display 252
Spare wheel 271
Spare wheel bolts 273
Towing the vehicle 299
Vehicle jack 272
Vehicle tool kit 272
Premium unleaded gasoline 320

Index

Problems
While driving 50
Program mode selector switch 330
Automatic transmission 136
Q
Quick search
Phone book* 128
R
Radio
Selecting stations 111
Station search 111
Station selection setting 122
Radio mode 165
Radio see Radio mode
Radio transmitters, control
and operation 222
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 126
Rapid seat heating
Switching on 92
Reading lamp 26
Rear bench seat
Foldable 192

Rear fog lamp 281
Bulb 281
Switching on 98
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 285
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air outlets 149, 158
Rear seat head restraints 91
Adjusting 36
Folding back 37
Installing 91
Placing upright 37
Removing 91
Rear seats
Adjusting head restraint height 37
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 138
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 147, 156
Activating 147, 156
Deactivating 147, 156
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 295
Refrigerant
Air conditioner 319
Regular checks 225

Reinstalling vehicle battery 295
Remote controls
Integrated 210
SmartKey 82
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 208
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 330
Removing
Vehicle battery 295
Wheel 290
Wiper blade insert 287
Wiper blades 287
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 285
Brake lamp bulbs 285
Bulbs 280
Front lamp bulbs 282
Front turn signal bulbs 282, 283
High beam bulbs 282
High beam bulbs (xenon-type headlamps) 283
License plate lamp bulbs 286
Low beam bulbs 282
Parking lamp bulbs 283, 284
Rear fog lamp bulbs 285
Rear lamp bulbs 281, 285

347

Index

Rear turn signal bulbs 285
Side marker lamp bulbs 285
Standing lamp bulbs 283, 284
Wiper blades 287
Reset knob in the instrument cluster 114
Resetting
All functions (control system) 114
All functions of a submenu 115
Fuel consumption 125
Service indicator (FSS) 239
Trip odometer 103
Residual heat utilization 158, 330
Residual ventilation 158
REST (Residual engine heat utilization) 330
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 65, 69
Reverse (manual transmission)
Shifting into 131
Rims 311
Roadside assistance
Tele Aid* 204
Rolling code programming 211
RON 225
RON (Research Octane Number) 330
Roof rack 192
Rotating wheels 235

348

Rubber parts
Cleaning 244
S
Safety
Occupant 56
Safety belts see Seat belts 41
Safety systems
Driving 73
Saving current speed 190
Searching
Radio station 111
Seat belt force limiter 64
Seat belt outlet height adjustment 43
Seat belts 62
Cleaning 244
Fastening 41
Height adjustment 43
Proper use of 43, 63
Safety guidelines 60
Warning lamp 250
Seat heater*
Switching off 92
Switching on 92
Seats 89
Adjusting 32
Easy entry/exit feature 89

Heater 91
Manual 33
Rapid seat heating 92
Split rear bench seat 192
Selecting
Display 118
Selector lever 23
Lock 45
Position (automatic transmission) 23,
132
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 68
Tele Aid* 202
Service
Calling up the service indicator 239
Major service (Service B) 238
Minor service (Service A) 238
Overdue 238
Spare parts 306
Types 238
When due 238
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 307

Index

Service indicator 238
Calling up 239
Clearing 238, 239
Service life (tires) 234
Service System see FSS 238
Setting
Convenience functions 115, 123
Cruise control 190
Daytime running lamp mode 119
Exterior rear view mirror parking position 95
Higher speed in cruise control 191
Hours (clock) 116
Individual vehicle settings 114
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 121
Key dependent memory 124
Lamps and lighting (control system)
119
Language, multifunction display 118
Locator lighting 120
Lower speed in cruise control 191
Miles/kilometers in speedometer 117
Minutes (clock) 116
Night security illumination 120
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 124

Slower speed in cruise control 191
Speed in cruise control 191
Speedometer display mode 117
Station selection mode 122
Temperature (interior) 145, 152
Temperature indicator 117
Time display mode (Clock) 117
Units
Speedometer 117
Temperature 117
Settings
Convenience functions 123
Factory, SmartKey 83
Individual (SmartKey) 124
Lighting (control system) 119
Menus and submenus 107
Resetting all (control system) 114
Resetting in the submenu 115
Selective 83
Settings menu
Functions in 114
Individual vehicle settings 114
Submenus 114
Shift lock 330

Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 135
Gearshift lever 130
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 133
Into reverse (manual transmission) 131
Side impact airbags 61
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 285
Side windows
Automatic opening 183
Cleaning 243
Closing 182, 183
Closing with SmartKey 183
Opening 182, 183
Opening fully 183
Opening with SmartKey 183
Stopping 183
Signal strength (telephone*) 127
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 49
Single wipe 49
Sliding/pop-up roof 185
Closing 186, 278
Closing with SmartKey 187
Opening 186, 278

349

Index

Opening with SmartKey 187
Stopping 186
Synchronizing 188, 279
SmartKey
Changing battery 276
Locking and unlocking 82
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof with 187
Opening and closing windows with 183
Unlocking with 30
Snow chains 237
Soft keys
Audio system 162
Spare parts service 306
Spare tire
Inflating 292
Spare wheel* 271
Bolts 273
Mounting 288
Speed
Saving current 190
Speed settings
Cruise control 191
Speedometer 23
Settings units 117

350

Speedometer display mode
Selecting 117
Split rear bench seat 192
SRS 63, 331
Indicator lamp 248
Standing lamps 96
Replacing bulbs 280, 281, 283, 284
Standing water
Driving instructions 221
Starter switch 21, 31
Positions 31
Starting difficulties 45
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 44
Station (radio)
Search 111
Station selection
Setting 122
Steering column
Height adjustment 38, 39
Length adjustment 38, 39
Steering wheel
Adjusting 37
Buttons 24
Cleaning 243
Electrical adjustment 38

Height adjustment 39
Manual adjustment 38
Steering wheel adjust
Message in display 268
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 209
Stopping
Sliding/pop-up roof 186
Sunshades for the
sliding/pop-up roof 185
Windows 183
Storage compartments
Armrest 196
Glove box 195
Ventilated compartments 148
Storage spaces
Cup holder 196
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 94
Submenus
Convenience 123
For settings 107
In control system 109
Instrument cluster 116
Lighting 119

Index

Resetting functions in
Control system 115
Selecting 114
Settings menu 114
Vehicle 122
Sun visors 141
Sunshades for the sliding/pop-up roof
Closing 185
Opening 185
Stopping 185
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 331
Switching off
Audio system 162
Automatic central locking
(control system) 122
Delayed (exterior lamps) 120
Engine 52
ESP 76
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 52
Seat heating 92
Switching on
Audio system 162
Automatic central locking
(control system) 122
ESP 77

Front fog lamps 98
Hazard warning flasher 99
Headlamps 47
High beams 99
Rapid seat heating 92
Rear fog lamp 98
Seat heating* 92
Windshield wipers 48
Synchronizing
Sliding/pop-up roof 188, 279
T
Tachometer 23, 103
Displaying gear range 134
Overspeed range 103
Tail lamps
Cleaning 242
Replacing bulbs 281, 285
Tailgate
Message in display 269
Tar stains 241
Technical data 319
Brake fluid 319
Coolant 317
Coolants 321
Electrical system 314
Engine 310

Engine oil 319
Engine oil additives 319
Fuel requirements 320
Fuels 317
Gasoline additives 321
Lubricants 317
Main dimensions 315
Premium unleaded gasoline 320
Rims and tires 311
Weights 316
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 318, 324
Tele Aid
Information 206
Initiating an emergency call
manually 204
Messages in display 269
Roadside assistance 204
Tele Aid System 201
Tele Aid System 331
Tele Aid* 201
Emergency calls 202
Remote door unlock 208
Stolen vehicle tracking services 209
System self-check 202
Upgrade signals 207

351

Index

Telephone
Emergency call 179
Telephone* 24, 200
Answering a call 128
Dialing a number from the phone book
128
Ending a call 128
Hands-free microphone 26
Loading phone book* 128
Messages in display 269
Operating 126
Operation 176
Redialing 129
Temperature
Display mode 117
Grades of tires 326
Setting interior temperature 145
Setting units in display 117
Tires 235
Tightening torque 331
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 291
Tilt
Backrest 33
Head restraint 34
Seat cushion 33

352

Time
Setting hours 116
Setting minutes 116
Time display
Setting 117
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 225, 234
Tire speed rating 219, 331
Tire traction 219
Tires 233, 311
Collapsible 328
Consumer information 325
Direction of rotation 234
Driving instructions 218
Retreads 233
Rims and tires 311
Service life 234
Temperature 235
Temperature grades 326
Tread depth 236
Wear pattern 235
Winter 236
Tools 272
Tow-away alarm 25, 79
Arming 79
Disarming 79

Disarming for transport 79
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 302
Towing the vehicle 299
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 209
Traction 136, 325, 331
Transmission see
Automatic transmission 229
Transmission selector lever 277
Unlocking manually 277
Tread depth (tires) 236
Treadwear 325
Trim panel
Opening 304
Trip computer 125
Trip odometer
Resetting 103
Trunk
Auxiliary fuse box 304
Lighting 101
Trunk lid 85
Trunk lid
Closing 86
Emergency release 86
Opening 85

Index

Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 280, 281
Turn signals 47
Additional in mirrors 280
Cleaning lenses 242
Front bulbs 280, 282, 284
Indicator lamps 23
Rear bulbs 281, 286
Turning off
Engine 52
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 117
Setting temperature units 117
Unlocking 30, 82
Driver’s door in an emergency 274
Fuel filler flap 224
Global 83
In an emergency 274
Selective settings 83
Transmission selector lever
manually 277
Trunk lid in an emergency 275
Vehicle in an emergency 208
With the SmartKey 30

Upgrade signals
Tele Aid* 207
Uphill driving
Cruise control 190
Upshifting 133
Useful features 195
Ashtrays 198
Cigarette lighter 199
Garage door opener 209
Interior storage spaces 195
Tele Aid* 201
Telephone* 200
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 114, 115
Locking 25
Locking in an emergency 275
Lowering 291
Service battery 294
Towing 299
Unlocking 25
Unlocking in an emergency 274
Vehicle battery 294
Vehicle care 240
Cup holder 243
Engine cleaning 242

Gear selector lever 243
Hard plastic trim items 244
Headlamps 242
Instrument cluster 243
Leather upholstery 244
Light alloy wheels 243
MB Tex upholstery 244
Ornamental moldings 242
Paintwork 241
Plastic and rubber parts 244
Power washer 241
Seat belts 244
Steering wheel 243
Tail lamps 242
Tar stains 241
Turn signals 242
Vehicle washing 242
Window cleaning 243
Wiper blades 243
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 308
Vehicle jack 272
Vehicle lighting
Checking 225

353

Index

Vehicle tool kit 272
Alignment bolt 272
Spare fuses 272
Special fuse puller 272
Towing eye bolt 272
Vehicle jack 272
Wheel bolts 272
Wheel wrench 272
Vehicle washing 242
Ventilated storage compartment 148
Ventilation
Storage compartment 148
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 308,
331
Voice control system* 331
Voice recognition system*
Hands-free microphone 26
W
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 62
Parking brake 46
Warranty coverage 307
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 240
Wear pattern (tires) 235
Weights 316

354

Wheel change
Tightening torque 291
Wheels
Rotating 235
Tires and wheels 233
Window curtain airbags 61
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 145, 153
Refilling washer fluid 232
Replacing wiper blades 287
Washer fluid 232, 324
Washer system 324
Windshield washer fluid 324
Message in display 270
Mixing ratio 324
Refilling 232
Wiping with 49
Windshield washer system 324
Windshield wipers 48
Fast wiper speed 48
Replacing wiper blades 287
Single wipe 49
Switching on 48
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 49

Winter driving 236
Block heater 237
Snow chains 237
Tires 236
Transmission program mode 136
Winter driving instructions 220
Winter tires 236
Wiper blades
Cleaning 243
Installing 287
Removing 287
Removing insert 287
Replacing 287
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 49
Interval 48
With windshield washer fluid 49
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon 327

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

G

Warning!

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2284-31
Press time 12/13/02
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany

Error: This Masterpage should never be used!



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Count                      : 356
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:1b9f0d3d-b703-4bfd-a462-7f692e4833d4
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2003:06:02 07:29:51Z
Modify Date                     : 2004:07:12 14:59:09-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:07:12 14:59:09-04:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145
Document ID                     : uuid:259b42ad-f436-42fe-a686-2600943e9d2a
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : template.book
Creator                         : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu